Online Facilities

This chapter contains the following topics:

Overview

The Online facility is the basic means of communication between the user and Control-O.

Online rule definition gives you the ability to define and modify rule definitions in the Control-O environment.

The Message Statistics screen displays statistics for messages and commands intercepted by Control-O.

The Rule Status screen selectively displays the statuses of rules that have been loaded into memory by Control-O. The Rule Status screen can also be used to hold, delete or free rules.

Automation Options that display, modify, or act upon IOA components or system components can be selected. Customized Automation Options can be designed and added to the Automation Options provided by Control-O.

The Automation Log screen displays the stream of messages and commands captured by Control-O together with additional information relevant to the automation process.

The IOA Variable Database Definition facility enables definition and modification of databases containing Global AutoEdit variables. Variable databases are used extensively by Control-O/COSMOS. For more information, see the Control-O/COSMOS User Guide.

The Control-O/COSMOS Status screen displays resources controlled by Control-O/COSMOS. For more information, see the Control-O/COSMOS User Guide.

The KOA Recorder facility captures manually entered keystrokes and generates a KOA script.

The following pages describe the main features of the Online facility.

IOA Features

This section discusses the IOA features common to all INCONTROL products.

General IOA Features

General IOA features include:

  • Customization

  • Environment Support

  • Terminal Support

  • Special Character Usage on Terminals

  • Color Support

  • Prefixing

  • Character Masking

Customization

IOA screens, constants, messages, colors, commands and PFKey definitions can be site-modified to adapt them to local needs. For further details see the INCONTROL for z/OS Installation Guide.

INCONTROL products can be customized globally, that is, for the whole site, using the INCONTROL Installation and Customization Engine (ICE), according to profile variables defined during installation.

In addition, INCONTROL products can be customized to respond differently to individual users if these profile variables are specified in User profile members.

For example, depending on the setting of a variable in a particular User profile member, upon exit from a screen in which changes have been requested, this INCONTROL product may either perform the requested changes automatically, or display a confirmation window before performing the changes.

Customization issues are discussed in the IOA administration chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

Due to customization, screens and examples illustrated in this guide may differ from the ones used at your site.

Environment Support

The Online facility can be activated under the following environments:

  • TSO (native)

  • TSO/ISPF

  • ROSCOE/ETSO

  • CICS

  • VTAM

  • IMS/DC

  • IDMS/DC

  • COM-PLETE

Cross memory interfaces to the Online monitor are optional under native TSO, TSO/ISPF and ROSCOE/ETSO. They are always used under the other environments.

There are slight differences in the operation of the online facility under the different environments. Special notes are provided in this guide where applicable.

Terminal Support

IOA supports the following models of IBM 3270 terminals:

  • Model 2 — 24 lines, 80 columns

  • Model 4 — 43 lines, 80 columns

  • Model 3 — 32 lines, 80 columns

  • Model 5 — 27 lines, 132 columns

When using the IOA online facility under IMS/DC and IDMS/DC, all model types display 24 lines and 80 columns.

IOA adjusts to the screen size to use the maximum available data area on the screen.

Special Character Usage on Terminals

In certain cases, special keyboard characters, such as $, #, and @, are assigned special meanings. The characters specified appear on standard American terminals but may not be available on other keyboards. In addition, some special characters on your keyboard may be assigned different hexadecimal values than the ones recognized by IOA. Special keyboard mapping requirements, and a complete discussion of the conventions used in this guide, are shown in Conventions Used in This Guide.

Color Support

Table 11 Special Characters and Hexadecimal Assignments

Character

Hexadecimal Assignment

$

5B

On British keyboards, use the £ (pound) symbol.   

|

4F

@

7C

Ø

5F

!

5A

\

E0

When INCONTROL products are activated from a screen with extended 7-color support, IOA makes extensive use of the color attributes of the screen.

Like all screen attributes, the color attribute for each field is defined externally to the program and can be locally modified by the site.

IOA does not automatically recognize IMS/DC and IDMS/DC terminals as supporting extended color attributes. If your IMS/DC or IDMS/DC terminal supports extended color attributes and you want IOA to recognize this, refer to the IOA administration chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide for more information.

At this time, IOA does not support extended color attributes under COM-PLETE.

Due to ISPF characteristics, color changes cannot occur in adjacent columns but must be separated by an attribute byte without color, that is, black. Therefore, some IOA screens have a different appearance under ISPF than under other online environments, such as native TSO and CICS.

Prefixing

For fields that automatically support prefixing, selection strings are always treated as prefixes. Selection is made if a segment of the text beginning with the first letter (that is, any prefix) matches the selection criteria.

Assume the following names exist: A3, A4, M, M01, M03, M12, M13, M22, M23, M30, M33, M103, M135, M301.

Table 12 Prefixing Examples

Entry

Matching Values

blank

All of the above values

A

A3, A4

M

M, M01, M03, M12, M13, M22, M23, M30, M33, M103, M135, M301

M1

M12, M13, M103, M135

M13

M13, M135

If a field supports prefixing, this is indicated in its description.

Character Masking

For fields that support masking, mask characters function as follows:

  • * represents any number of characters (including no characters).

  • ? represents any one character.

For fields that do not automatically support prefixing, a prefix value can be specified by ending the selection string with an asterisk.

Assume the following names exist: A3, M, M3, M01, M03, M13, M23, M33, M103, M435, M2243.

Table 13 Masking Examples

Entry

Matching values

*

All the above values

M?3

M03, M13, M23, M33

M?3*

M03, M13, M23, M33, M435

M??3

M103

M*3

M3, M03, M13, M23, M33, M103, M2243

M*

M, M3, M01, M03, M13, M23, M33, M103, M435, M2243

Since the last character in this example is *, M is treated as a prefix.

If a field supports masking, this fact is indicated in its description.

IOA Entry Panel

Enter the IOA online facility according to the instructions of your INCONTROL administrator. Upon entering the IOA online facility, the IOA Entry Panel may be displayed.

Display of the IOA Entry Panel is optional. If your INCONTROL administrator determined that the entry panel is bypassed, the IOA Primary Option menu, which is discussed in the following section, is displayed.

Figure 1 IOA Entry Panel

Copy
    ---------------------------  IOA ENTRY PANEL  -----------------------------   
   
   
   
   
            +-----------------------------------------------------------+
            |                                                           |
            |          USER ID      ===>                                |
            |                                                           |
            |          PASSWORD     ===>                                |
            |                                                           |
            |          NEW PASSWORD ===>           ===>                 |
            |                                                           |
            +-----------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
                                                      
                                            
   
   
   
   
        PLEASE FILL IN USER ID AND PASSWORD AND PRESS ENTER            18.30.18

Type your user ID and password and press Enter. If you enter a correct user ID and password, the IOA Primary Option menu is displayed.

The IOA online facility allows three attempts to enter a valid user ID and password combination. After the third unsuccessful attempt, the program is terminated.

To change a password, type the new password twice, once in the NEW PASSWORD field, and once in the confirmation field to the right of the NEW PASSWORD field.

IOA Primary Option Menu

The IOA Primary Option menu is the primary interface to functions available under the various INCONTROL products. The options displayed in the menu depend on the INCONTROL products installed at the site, and the functions and facilities that have been authorized to you.

If only Control-O is installed at your site, and you are authorized to access all functions and facilities, the screen shown in Figure 2 is displayed:

When the Online facility is activated as an ISPF application, Option 6 is displayed as "6 UTILITIES Online Utilities." In this case, Option 6 activates the Online utilities under ISPF. When the Online facility is not activated under TSO or TSO/ISPF, Option 6 is inactive.

Figure 2 IOA Primary Option Menu when only Control-O is Installed

Copy
 --------------------       IOA PRIMARY OPTION MENU       ------------------(1)
 OPTION ===>                                               USER        N22A    
                                                           DATE        19.08.01
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
   4   COND-RES          IOA Conditions/Resources Display                      
   5   LOG               IOA Log Display                                       
   6   TSO               Enter TSO Command                                     
   7   MANUAL COND       IOA Manual Conditions Display                         
   8   CALENDAR DEF      IOA Calendar Definition                               
  IV   VARIABLE DATABASE IOA Variable Database Definition Facility             
   C   CMEM DEFINITION   CTM Event Manager Rule Definition                     
  OR   RULE DEFINITION   CTO Rule Definition                                   
  OM   MSG STATISTICS    CTO Message Statistics Display                        
  OS   RULE STATUS       CTO Rule Status Display                               
  OL   AUTOMATION LOG    CTO Automation Log Display                            
  OA   AUTOMATION OPTS   CTO Automation Options Menu                           
  OC   COSMOS STATUS     CTO COSMOS Status Screens                             
  OK   KOA RECORDER      CTO Record VTAM Scripts                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
 COMMANDS:  X - EXIT, HELP, INFO  OR CHOOSE A MENU OPTION              18.11.23

To select an option, type the option number or letter in the OPTION field and press Enter. Alternatively, for a number option, press the PFKey with the same number. For example, to select the LOG option, press PF05/PF17.

Your INCONTROL administrator can limit the options displayed on a user-by-user basis, and can alter option numbers and customize option descriptions. Product-supplied default options are discussed in this guide.

Option OK (KOA Recorder facility) is available only under IOATSO, and not under IOAISPF or IOAMON.

Certain IOA functions and facilities (options) are shared by all INCONTROL products. These shared IOA commands, functions and facilities are described later in this chapter, and outlined in Table 14.

Table 14 INCONTROL Shared IOA Functions and Facilities

Option

Function

Description

4

COND/RES

Display and update the status of the IOA Conditions file and the Control-M Resources file.

5

LOG

View audit trail information about jobs, missions, and rules scheduled under the supervision of INCONTROL products.

6

 

TSO

Perform TSO commands.

When the Online facility is activated as an ISPF application, Option 6 is displayed as "6  UTILITIES Online Utilities." In this case, Option 6 activates the Online utilities under ISPF. When the Online facility is not activated under TSO or TSO/ISPF, Option 6 is inactive.

7

MANUAL COND

Display the list of prerequisite conditions that should be confirmed manually by operations personnel.

8

CALENDAR DEF

Define scheduling calendars.

X

EXIT

Exit the Online facility.

INFO

INFO

Display a window in the IOA Primary Option Menu. The window contains information about installed INCONTROL products. For more details on the information displayed by this command, refer to "IOA Version Information" later in this chapter.

Entering =1 in the command line of any other screen returns you to the IOA Primary Option Menu that is displayed at your site.

The functions and facilities (options) shown in Table 15 are applicable to Control-O.

Table 15 Control-O Functions and Facilities

Option

Function

Description

IV

IOA VARIABLE DATABASE DEFINITION

IOA Variable Database Definition facility

This is also available to Control-M.

OR

CTO RULE DEFINITION

Control-O Rule Definition facility.

OM

CTO MESSAGE STATISTICS DISPLAY

Control-O Message Statistics facility.

OS

CTO RULE STATUS DISPLAY

Control-O Rule Status facility.

OL

CTO AUTOMATION LOG DISPLAY

Control-O Automation Log facility.

OA

CTO AUTOMATION OPTIONS MENU

Control-O Automation Options facility.

OC

CTO COSMOS STATUS SCREENS

Control-O/COSMOS Status Monitoring System, a separately licensed product described in the Control-O/COSMOS User Guide.

OK

CTO RECORD VTAM SCRIPTS

KOA Recorder facility to record VTAM scripts.

The IOA Primary Option menu shown in Figure 3 is displayed at sites supporting all currently available INCONTROL mainframe products.

Option OK (KOA Recorder facility) is available only under IOATSO, and not under IOAISPF or IOAMON.

When the IOA online facility is activated as an ISPF application, Option 6 is displayed as "6  UTILITIES Online Utilities." In this case, Option 6 activates the Online utilities under ISPF. When the online facility is not activated under TSO or TSO/ISPF, Option 6 is inactive.

Figure 3 IOA Primary Option Menu when all INCONTROL Products are Installed

Copy
---------------------       IOA PRIMARY OPTION MENU       ------------------(1)
OPTION ===>                                               USER        N06  
                                                                              
IOA                        CONTROL-D/V                CONTROL-O            
                                                                              
  4  COND-RES                A  MISSION STATUS         OR  RULE DEFINITION 
  5  LOG                     M  MISSION DEF            OM  MSG STATISTICS  
  6  TSO                     R  REPORT DEF             OS  RULE STATUS     
  7  MANUAL COND             T  RECIPIENT TREE         OL  AUTOMATION LOG  
  8  CALENDAR DEF            U  USER REPORTS           OA  AUTOMATION OPTS 
 IV  VARIABLE DATABASE       F  PC PACKET STATUS       OC  COSMOS STATUS   
                            DO  OBJECTS                OK  KOA RECORDER    
                                                                              
                                                                              
CONTROL-M & CTM/Restart    CONTROL-M/Analyzer         CONTROL-M/Tape       
                                                                              
  2  JOB SCHEDULE DEF       BB  BALANCING STATUS       TR  RULE DEFINITION 
  3  ACTIVE ENV.            BM  MISSION DEF            TP  POOL DEFINITION 
  C  CMEM DEFINITION        BV  DB VARIABLE DEF        TV  VAULT DEFINITION
  W  WORKLOAD MANAGEMENT    BR  RULE DEFINITION        TI  INQ/UPD MEDIA DB
                            BA  RULE ACTIVITY          TC  CHECK IN EXT VOL
                                                                              
                                                                              
COMMANDS:  X - EXIT, HELP, INFO  OR CHOOSE A MENU OPTION               16.20.21

Entering =1 in the command line of any other screen returns you to the IOA Primary Option Menu that is displayed at your site.

For a description of the options for other INCONTROL products, see the user guides of the respective products.

Additional options available on the IOA Primary Option Menu when operating Control-O with other INCONTROL products, are listed in Table 16.

Table 16 IOA Primary Option Menu Options

Option

Name

Description

2

JOB SCHEDULE DEF

Define or modify job production parameters.

3

JOB STATUS

Display and update status of jobs scheduled under Control-M.

C

CMEM DEFINITION

Define or modify CMEM rules.

W

WORKLOAD MANAGEMENT

Define or modify Workload Policies and Load-Indexes.

The 2, 3, C, and W options are available only at sites where Control-M is installed.

A

MISSION STATUS

Display and update active mission status.

M

MISSION DEF

Define migration, printing, backup, and restore missions.

R

REPORT DEF

Define decollating missions (including indexing).

T

RECIPIENT TREE

Display and update the recipient tree.

U

USER REPORTS

Display and update the status of user reports. View reports online.

F

PC PACKET STATUS

Display the status of reports (packets) scheduled for transfer from the mainframe to a PC.

DO

OBJECTS

Manage Control-D objects.

The A, M, R, T, U, F, and DO options are available only at sites where Control-D or Control-V are installed.

BB

BALANCING STATUS

Display and update the status of active balancing missions.

BM

MISSION DEF

Define balancing missions.

BV

DB VARIABLE DEF

Define, display and update Database variables.

BR

RULE DEFINITION

Define balancing rules.

BA

RULE ACTIVITY

Display rule activity and the result of invoking Control-M/Analyzer rules.

The BB, BM, BV, BR, and BA options are available only at sites where Control-M/Analyzer is installed.

TR

RULE DEFINITION

Define rules.

TP

POOL DEFINITION

Define pools.

TV

VAULT DEFINITION

Define vaults.

TI

INQ/UPD MEDIA DB

Display the Inquire/Update screen.

TC

CHECK IN EXT VOL

Check in external volumes.

The TR, TP, TV, TI, and TC options are available only at sites where Control-M/Tape is installed.

IOA Version Information

Enter INFO (or I) in the OPTION field of the IOA Primary Option menu to display the IOA Version Information window, as illustrated in Figure 4. This window lists the version and level of each INCONTROL product installed at the site, plus the CPU ID and current system date. The IOA Version Information window also identifies the unique IOA QNAME assigned to the site. For further information about the IOA QNAME, see the IOA operational parameters step, the IOAPLEX parameters step, and the adding IOA structures to the CFRM step, all in the INCONTROL for z/OS Installation Guide. Press Enter or END (PF03/PF15) to exit the window and return to the IOA Primary Option menu.

Figure 4 IOA Version Information

Copy
---------------------       IOA PRIMARY OPTION MENU       ------------------(1)
OPTION ===>                                               USER        N06     
                                                                              
IOA                        CONTROL-D/V                CONTROL-O               
                +----------------------------------------------+              
  4  COND-RES   |           IOA VERSION INFORMATION            | EFINITION    
  5  LOG        |                                              | ATISTICS     
  6  TSO        |   IOA                  Version 6.1.00        | TATUS        
  7  MANUAL CON |   IOAGATE              Version 6.1.00        | TION LOG     
  8  CALENDAR D |   CONTROL-M            Version 6.1.00        | TION OPTS    
 IV  VARIABLE D |   CONTROL-M/RESTART    Version 6.1.00        |  STATUS      
                |   CONTROL-M/ANALYZER   Version 6.1.00        | CORDER       
                |   CONTROL-M/TAPE       Version 6.1.00        |              
                |   CONTROL-D            Version 6.1.00        |              
CONTROL-M & CTM |   CONTROL-V            Version 6.1.00        | ape          
                |   CONTROL-O            Version 6.1.00        |              
  2  JOB SCHEDU |                                              | EFINITION    
  3  ACTIVE ENV |                                              | EFINITION    
  C  CMEM DEFIN |   DATE  19.08.01  CPUID  02078D 7060         | DEFINITION   
                |   IOA QNAME  IOAR610                         | D MEDIA DB   
                |                                              | IN EXT VOL   
                +----------------------------------------------+              
                                                                              
COMMANDS:  X - EXIT, HELP, INFO  OR CHOOSE A MENU OPTION               17.00.29

Multi-Screen Control

It is not necessary to return to the IOA Primary Option menu to move from one online facility to another.

To speed up transfer of control between screens of different facilities and to enable you to manage several online facilities at the same time, transfer control commands can be specified. Transfer commands take you directly from your current screen to the requested screen. Transfer commands can be used to reach any screen that can be accessed through the IOA Primary Option menu at your site.

Each transfer control command consists of an equals sign immediately followed by one of the options of the IOA Primary Option menu, which represents the target screen of the transfer. For example, from any screen, enter:

Table 17 IOA Transfer Control Commands

Option

Description

=5

to access the IOA Log screen.

=4

to access the IOA Conditions/Resources screen.

=OS

to access the Control-O Rule Status screen.

=1

to access the IOA Primary Option menu.

If you use a transfer command to reach another screen, the state of the current screen remains unchanged when you return to it using another transfer command.

The INCONTROL administrator can globally deactivate any or all of the transfer commands.

Fast Exit From the IOA Online Facility

To exit immediately from the IOA Online facility, type =X on the command line and press Enter.

In most cases, the =X command has the same effect as pressing END (PF03/PF15) in all open screens and then entering X (Exit) in the IOA Primary Option menu. Any window, such as the Exit Option window, that would be displayed when exiting an open screen is displayed when the =X command is entered.

However, when the =X command is entered while definition screens such as the Calendar Definition screen are open, changes to the open definition screens are cancelled. Changes currently in definition facility list screens, for example, changes to previously closed definition screens, are not cancelled. Those screens and all other open screens are treated as if END (PF03/PF15) has been entered.

The =X command is intentionally not supported on certain screens.

Screen Layout

Most IOA screens are divided into four basic areas, as described in Table 18. The example shown in Figure 5 is the IOA Log screen.

Table 18 Basic IOA Screen Areas

Screen Area

Description

Screen Description and Message Line

This line at the top of the screen describes the purpose of the screen. In the example screen, this is the "IOA Log." A screen identifier may appear in the upper right corner. In the example screen, this is (5). This line is also used to display messages.

Screen Header and Command Area

This area is used for online commands, and, where applicable, headings of the screen data.

Data Area

On some screens, the data area can be scrolled. For more information, see Scrolling Commands.

Screen Bottom

This area of the screen usually contains a list of available commands or options (in the example screen, SHOW, GROUP, CATEGORY, and SHPF), or a brief explanation about screen usage. The current time is displayed in the lower right corner.

Figure 5 IOA Log Screen

Copy
FILTER:            ---------------- IOA LOG  -------------------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 291201 - 010102
DATE   TIME   ODATE  USERID   CODE    ------ M E S S A G E --------------------
311201 184915 311201 K48      SUB13AI JOB K48RUN1 / OID=005W9 SUBMITTER STARTED
                                       PROCESSING JOB ON SYSTEM: OS35         
311201 184915 311201 K48      SUB133I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9     
                                      SUBMITTED FROM LIBRARY (P) K48.LIB.JOB  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SPY28GI JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 TAPE
                                      DRIVE UNITS USED=00 00                  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SPY281I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 START
                                       01365.1849 STOP 01365.1849 CPU 0MIN    
                                      00.05SEC SRB 0MIN 00.00SEC 0.00 4AOS35  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SPY254I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9     
                                      SCANNED                                 
311201 184918 311201 K48      SEL216W JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9     
                                      UNEXPLAINED COND CODE 0015 STEP EXEC /  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SEL214I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 RERUN
                                       NEEDED                                 
311201 184918 311201 K48      SEL205I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 RERUN
                                       IN PROCESS USING MEM K48RUN1           
311201 184918 311201 K48      SEL286I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9     
                                      WAITING FOR CONFIRMATION                
CMDS: SHOW, GROUP, CATEGORY, SHPF                                      08.57.11

Commands and PFKeys

Commands are entered by typing a command in the COMMAND field and then pressing Enter, or by pressing a predefined PFKey, or a combination of both.

It is not necessary to enter the full command name; the shortest unique abbreviation of the command is sufficient. If the abbreviation is ambiguous, an appropriate message is displayed in the message area.

IOA commands are flexible; you can change command syntax or provide aliases (synonyms) to suit your site. If you want to add or change a command syntax, consult BMC Customer Support. The examples provided in this chapter exhibit the original command syntax supplied with this INCONTROL product.

PFKey command assignments can be site-customized. It is possible to assign PFKeys differently for each screen. To change PFKey command assignments, see your INCONTROL administrator.

Supplied PFKey definitions are consistent throughout most of the screens. For example, PF08/PF20 is used to scroll down (forward) on all INCONTROL screens where scrolling is possible.

Table 19 Common PFKey Definitions

PFKey

Description

PF01/PF13

HELP

PF02/PF14

SHOW (where applicable)

When the IOA Online facility is activated in ISPF mode (as an ISPF application), PF02/PF14 are usually assigned the ISPF SPLIT command. For more information, see IOA Under ISPF.

PF03/PF15

END – exit current screen and go back one level

PF04/PF16

RESET (where applicable)

PF05/PF17

FIND (where applicable)

PF06/PF18

=6 – transfer to TSO screen or application or to UTILITIES screen

This is disabled under ROSCOE/ETSO, CICS, VTAM, IMS/DC, IDMS/DC, COM-PLETE, and TSO cross memory option.

PF07/PF19

UP – scroll backward

PF08/PF20

DOWN – scroll forward

PF10/PF22

LEFT or PREV (where applicable)

PF11/PF23

RIGHT or NEXT (where applicable)

PF12

RETRIEVE – retrieves a sequence of commands and options entered by the user during the current session. These commands and options are displayed in reverse order on the command line of the current screen.

PF24

SHPF

To see the PFKey assignment of the screen with which you are working, type the SHPF reserved command in the command line and press Enter. The window show in Figure 6, describing the current PFKey assignment, is displayed. Press Enter again to close the window.

Figure 6 PFKey Assignment Window

Copy
FILTER:            ---------------- IOA LOG  -------------------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 291201 - 010102
DATE   TIME   ODATE  USERID   CODE    ------ M E S S A G E --------------------
311201 184915 311201 K48      SUB13AI JOB K48RUN1 / OID=005W9 SUBMITTER STARTED
                                       PROCESSING JOB ON SYSTEM: OS35         
311201 184915 311201 K48      SUB133I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9     
                                      SUBMITTED FROM LIBRARY (P) K48.LIB.JOB  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SPY28GI JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 TAPE
                                      DRIVE UNITS USED=00 00                  
311201 184918 311201 K48      SPY281I JOB K48RUN1 K48RUN /27255 OID=005W9 START
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                            |
|     ENTER ENTER                     PF13  HELP                             |
|     PF01  HELP                      PF14  SHOW                             |
|     PF02  SHOW                      PF15  END                              |
|     PF03  END                       PF16  RESET                            |
|     PF04  RESET                     PF17  FIND                             |
|     PF05  FIND                      PF18  =6                               |
|     PF06  =6                        PF19  UP                               |
|     PF07  UP                        PF20  DOWN                             |
|     PF08  DOWN                      PF24  SHPF                             |
|     PF12  RETRIEVE                                                         |
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+

If you type text in the COMMAND field and press a PFKey, the text in the COMMAND field is treated as a subparameter of the command assigned to the PFKey.

Additional key definitions are shown in Table 20.

Table 20 Additional Key Assignments

Key

Description

PA1

ABORT – forced exit

If you press PA1 while in AutoRefresh mode, AutoRefresh mode is canceled.

AutoRefresh mode is described in AutoRefresh Mode.

PA2

Under native TSO and ROSCOE, the first time you press this key, the screen is refreshed. The second consecutive time, a copy of the screen is sent to be printed, or to a file, using a PRTDBG DD statement. For terminal models supporting PA3, the PA3 key is defined in exactly the same way as PA2.

When the IOA online facility is activated as an ISPF application, PA2 is controlled by ISPF, and only refreshes the screen. To print the screen, see IOA Under ISPF. Under other online environments, such as CICS and VTAM, PA2 serves as a refresh only. Usually one of the PA keys is assigned a local print function.

For information on changing IOA PFKey definitions, see the appendix in the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide that deals with modifying IOA Online Facility Commands.

Scrolling Commands

Scrolling conventions are very similar to the ISPF conventions of IBM. The basic commands used for scrolling are shown in Table 21.

Table 21 Scrolling Commands

Command

PFKey

Description

UP

(PF07/PF19)

Scroll up (backward)

DOWN

(PF08/PF20)

Scroll down (forward)

These commands can be entered by typing the command in the COMMAND field or by pressing the predefined PFKey.

The scrolling amount is determined by the content of the SCROLL field in the right corner of the screen header. Valid scrolling amounts are shown in Table 22.

Table 22 Scrolling Amounts in the SCROLL Field

Scrolling Amount

Description

PAGE

Scroll a full page.

HALF

Scroll a half page.

CRSR

Scroll by cursor position. If the cursor is outside the data area, a full page is scrolled.

MAX

Scroll maximum available; for example, UP MAX scrolls to the top.

It is only necessary to type the first letter of the new amount in the SCROLL field in order to change the scrolling amount.

A scrolling amount other than that shown in the SCROLL field can be used by entering the amount directly after the scroll command itself, or by entering the scroll amount in the COMMAND field and pressing the appropriate scrolling PFKey. The scrolling amount in the SCROLL field remains unchanged.

Example

If PAGE is the value in the SCROLL field, to scroll to the bottom, type M (MAX) in the COMMAND field and press PF08 (DOWN).

LOCATE Command

The LOCATE command, and its abbreviation, L, can be used to search for items in the NAME field in all "directory type" screens that contain scrollable data, such as the Calendar List screen. The syntax of the command is

Copy
LOCATE string

In this command, string is the search string. Apostrophes (‘single quotes’) or quotation marks ("double quotes") are not required.

The search proceeds from the top of the list to the first item in the list that starts with the specified string. The cursor is positioned on the OPTION field at the beginning of the line containing the string, if found, or on the OPTION field of the alphabetically closest preceding value if the specified value is not found.

FIND Command

The FIND command, and its abbreviation, F, can be used in all screens that contain scrollable data to find and display the next occurrence of a character string. The syntax of the command is

Copy
FIND string [fromcol] [tocol] [PREV]

In this command

  • string is the search string. Mandatory.

  • fromcol is the first column in the search range. Optional.

  • tocol is the last column in the search range. Optional.

  • PREV is the indicator that the search must move backward, instead of forward, from the current cursor position. Optional.

General Rules

If the string contains blanks, enclose the string with apostrophes (‘single quotes’) or quotation marks ("double quotes"). For example:

Copy
FIND 'WAIT SCHEDULE'

The column range searched can be limited by entering fromcol or tocol values, or by entering both fromcol and tocol values.

The search for the string proceeds from the current cursor position forward, or backward if PREV is entered. If the string is found, the cursor is positioned at the start of the string.

To repeat the FIND to the next or previous occurrence of the string, press PF05/PF17.

The following situations outline where the FIND command can, or should, be further modified to enhance its functionality.

  • Some screens enable the user to limit the number of lines searched by a FIND command. This is discussed in the relevant screen descriptions.

  • In some screens, the FIND command does not detect information that is to the right or left of the information displayed in the monitor. To ensure detection of the desired string, the screen must be displayed in wraparound mode, when available, before executing the FIND command.

Text String Searches

The FIND command can also be used to search for text strings, in which case the command will find all instances of the string, regardless of whether the characters within the string are lowercase, uppercase, or mixed case. To search for a text string, include the letter T immediately before a quoted string.

Copy
FIND T'WAIT SCHEDULE'

will find WAIT SCHEDULE, and it will also find wait schedule, and Wait Schedule, and any other case variant.

Text string searches are the default. If your system default is for text strings, You do not need to include the T if you perform a text string search. Your INCONTROL administrator can change the default to character string. In this case you do not need to include the C if you perform a character string search.

Character String Searches

The FIND command can be used to search for character strings, in which case the command will find all instances of the string, but only where the string contains characters that match the case specified. To search for a character string, include the letter C immediately before a quoted string.

Copy
FIND C'WAIT SCHEDULE'

will find WAIT SCHEDULE, but it will not find wait schedule, or Wait Schedule, or any other case variant.

CANCEL and RESET Commands

CANCEL and RESET commands are entered in the COMMAND field.

The CANCEL command cancels changes made in a definition screen, such as the IOA Calendar Definition screen, and exits the screen.

The RESET command (PF04/PF16) cancels Edit environment options specified in a definition screen. It does not cancel changes already made and it does not exit the screen or cancel Edit environment mode. For more information about the Edit environment, see Editing Rule Definitions in the IOA Edit Environment.

The RESET command (PF04/PF16) can also be used in most windows, for example, the Show Screen Filter window, to cancel changes and close the window.

Online Help

The following types of online help are available for INCONTROL screens:

Screen help

Provides information about the entire screen. This help is available on all INCONTROL screens and is accessed by pressing the HELP key (PF01/PF13) while the cursor is positioned on the COMMAND field in the screen.

Line-sensitive Help

Provides information about the fields on a particular line on a screen. This help is available on several INCONTROL screens. It is accessed by pressing the HELP key (PF01/PF13) while the cursor is positioned on the desired line of the screen.

If line-sensitive help is not supported in a screen, pressing the HELP key (PF01/PF13) from anywhere in the screen displays the beginning of the Help panel.

Figure 7 IOA Help Screen

Copy
------------------------------ IOA HELP SCREEN --------------------- (CTMHDT2 )
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
                                                                             
  Calendar List Screen                                                       
  ====================                                                       
                                                                             
  The Calendar List screen displays a list of calendars (members) in the     
  specified library. This screen can be entered directly from the entry      
  panel or upon exiting the Year List screen.                                
                                                                             
  By default, only calendar names are listed in the screen. However, if      
  the default has been modified at time of installation, statistical         
  information is displayed for each calendar name.                           
                                                                             
  Use the scrolling PFKeys to scroll forward (PF08/PF20) and backward        
  (PF07/PF19) on the Calendar List.                                          
                                                                             
  To return to the entry panel, press END (PF03/PF15).                       
                                                                             
                                                                             
  Options of the Calendar List Screen                                        
  -----------------------------------                                        
  To request one of the following options, specify the option in the OPT 
ENTER END OR PF03/PF15 TO EXIT THE HELP SCREEN                         08.55.40
Help can be scrolled using standard scrolling conventions.
To return to the original screen, use the END command (PF03/PF15).

The Help member name appears on the right in the Help screen header. Members containing the Help descriptions can be found in the IOA MSG library.

AutoRefresh Mode

Certain INCONTROL screens, as noted in this chapter where appropriate, support AutoRefresh mode. A screen display in AutoRefresh mode is automatically updated periodically with the most current data.

AutoRefresh mode can only be activated under native TSO or under ISPF. AutoRefresh mode is activated by the AUTO command. The format of the command is

Copy
AUTO n

In this command, n is any number of seconds from 1 through 99.

The screen is updated when the AUTO command is issued, and then periodically updated according to the interval (in seconds) specified in the AUTO command. A counter at the top of the screen displays the number of times the screen has been refreshed.

The AUTO 5 command refreshes the screen every 5 seconds.

Cancelling AutoRefresh Mode

Under native TSO, the recommended method of cancelling AutoRefresh mode is as follows:

  • For short interval values – Press Enter. Whenever Enter is pressed, or a command is issued, AutoRefresh mode is automatically cancelled at the end of the current interval.

  • For long interval values – Press Attn (PA1) once.

Under ISPF, press Attn (PA1) or Esc once to cancel AutoRefresh mode.

When using a terminal emulation program, you must ensure that the Esc key is properly mapped and sent as an Attn (PA1) key.

IOA Under ISPF

The IOA Online facility can be activated as an ISPF application. As such, it can work in ISPF split screen mode like any other ISPF application.

WARNING: Multiple calls to the IOA ISPF interface can be performed in ISPF split screen mode as long as all invocations are for the same IOA environment. Otherwise, the results may be unpredictable.

The command line of the IOA Online facility is controlled by IOA. It is not possible to enter ISPF commands in an IOA screen. The ISPF commands shown in Table 23 must be defined to PFKeys.

Table 23 ISPF Commands that must be defined for PFKeys

Command

PFkey

SPLIT

Usually PF02/PF14

SWAP

Usually PF09/PF21

The rest of the PFKeys are controlled by IOA PFKey definitions, which are in the IOA PARM library.

It is possible to assign TSO/ISPF commands such as PRINT to PFKeys, or to change PFKey definitions by performing the following steps:

  1. Exit from IOA and ISPF to the READY prompt.

  2. Type the following command and press Enter:

    Copy
    ISPSTART PANEL(ISR@PRIM) NEWAPPL(CTM)

    This command brings you to ISPF.

  3. Type the KEYS command and press Enter. A set of key definitions is displayed.

  4. Modify the key definitions as desired and exit from ISPF.

    ISPF KEY definitions for the following ISPF commands take precedence over IOA PFKey definitions: SPLIT, SWAP, KEYS, PRINT, PFSHOW. For example, if PF02 is defined as SPLIT in ISPF, an IOA definition for PF02 is ignored in online screens.

    For all other ISPF commands, such as UP or DOWN, the key definitions in ISPF are ignored and the PFKey is interpreted according to the definition in the IOA Online facility.

    Under ISPF, IOA Option6 activates the Online Utilities panel. For more information about these utilities, see the INCONTROL for z/OS Utilities Guide.

    For more information on changing IOA PFKey definitions, see the appendix in the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide that deals with modifying IOA Online Facility Commands.

IOA Editor

The IOA Editor enables you to edit members of a partitioned data set (PDS) using an editor similar to the ISPF editor. Enter EDMEM in the command line of any screen to display the Edit Entry Panel window, as shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8 IOA Editor Edit Entry Panel

Copy
---------------------       IOA PRIMARY OPTION MENU       ------------------(1)
OPTION ===>                                               USER        N06     
                                                                              
IOA                        CONTROL-D/V                CONTROL-O               
                                                                              
  4  COND/RES                A  MISSION STATUS         OR  RULE DEFINITION    
  5  +--------------------------------------------------------------+ICS      
  6  |                     EDIT ENTRY PANEL                         |         
  7  |                                                              |LOG      
  8  | LIBRARY ==>                                                  |OPTS     
 IV  |                                                              |US       
     | MEMBER  ==>                                                  |R        
     |                                                              |         
     | FILL IN PARAMETERS AND PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE OR PF3 TO EXIT|         
CONTR|                                                              |         
     +--------------------------------------------------------------+         
  2  JOB SCHEDULE DEF       BB  BALANCING STATUS       TR  RULE DEFINITION    
  3  ACTIVE ENV.            BM  MISSION DEF            TP  POOL DEFINITION    
  C  CMEM DEFINITION        BV  DB VARIABLE DEF        TV  VAULT DEFINITION   
                            BR  RULE DEFINITION        TI  INQ/UPD MEDIA DB   
                            BA  RULE ACTIVITY          TC  CHECK IN EXT VOL   
                                                                              
                                                                              
COMMANDS:  X - EXIT, HELP, INFO  OR CHOOSE A MENU OPTION               19.12.05

To create a new member or edit an existing member, fill in the LIBRARY and MEMBER parameters and press Enter. The IOA Editor screen is opened for editing, as shown in Figure 9.

If the member already exists in the specified library, the member is displayed for editing in the IOA Editor. Similarly, if you accessed the IOA Editor screen from Line Option J in either Screen 2 or Screen 3, the member in the library referred to in the schedule definition member will be displayed for editing.

Figure 9 IOA Editor

Copy
----------------------------  I O A   E D I T O R   ------------------- (EDMEM)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
ROW     PROD.V610.DEMO(TEST)                                        COL 001 072
                                                                              
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
......                                                                        
************************ B O T T O M  O F  D A T A ************************** 
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
OPTIONS:  I INSERT  D DELETE  R REPEAT  C COPY  M MOVE  UC/LC UPPER/LOWER CASE

IOA Editor PFKey Functions

While working within the IOA Editor, PFKeys perform the functions shown in Table 24.

Table 24 PFKey Functions Within the IOA Editor Screen

PFKeys

Description

PF01/PF13

Activates online help.

PF02/PF14

Saves the current member.

PF03/PF15

Terminates the editing session. If the edited member has been changed the member will be saved automatically.

PF04/PF16

Cancels the editing session without saving changes.

PF05/PF17

Invokes the FIND facility.

PF07/PF19

Scrolls forward.

PF08/PF20

Scrolls backward.

PF10/PF22

Scrolls left.

PF11/PF23

Scrolls right.

Commands of the IOA Editor Screen

Table 25 describes editing commands that can be executed by entering the command in the COMMAND line.

Table 25 IOA Editor Command Line Commands

Command

Description

SAVE

Saves all new data without terminating the edit session.

CANCEL

Terminates the edit session without saving new data.

COPY

Enables you to import a member from a specific library.

Table 26 describes editing commands that can be executed by entering the command in the leftmost position of the applicable row.

Table 26 IOA Editor Row Commands

Command

Description

I

Inserts a new line below the current line.
To insert more than one line for new data, enter Inn, where nn indicates the number of new lines to be inserted below the current line.

D

Deletes the current line.
To delete more than one line, enter Dnn, where nn indicates the number of lines to be deleted below the current line.
You can delete a block of lines by typing DD at the beginning of the first line of the block, and then entering DD at the beginning of the last line of the block.

R

Repeats the current line.
To repeat a single line one or more times, enter Rnn, where nn indicates the number of times the current line is to be repeated.
You can repeat a block of lines by typing RR at the beginning of the first line of the block, and then entering RR at the beginning of the last line of the block.

C

Identifies the source line for a copy operation.
To copy more than a single line, enter Cnn, where nn indicates the number of lines to be copied.
You can also copy a block of lines by typing CC at the beginning of the first line of the block, and then entering CC at the beginning of the last line of the block.

M

Identifies the source line for a move operation.
To move more than a single line, enter Mnn, where nn indicates the number of lines to be moved.
You can also move a block of lines by typing MM at the beginning of the first line of the block, and then entering MM at the beginning of the last line of the block.

A

Identifies the destination of a copy or move operation.
When a line or block of lines has been selected for copying or moving, enter A at the point after which the copied lines are to be inserted.

B

Identifies the destination of a copy or move operation.
When a line or block of lines has been selected for copying or moving, enter B at the point before which the moved lines are to be inserted.

LC

Changes text in a line from uppercase to lowercase.

To change text in more than a single line to lowercase, enter LCnn, where nn indicates the number of lines to be changed to lowercase.

UC

Changes text in a line from lowercase to uppercase.

To change text in more than a single line to uppercase, enter UCnn, where nn indicates the number of lines to be changed to uppercase.

IOA SET Command Panel

The IOA SET Command Panel enables you to set and stop TRACE levels, choose the language that is used in online screens and to set a dollar sign representation that will be used in online screens for system variables of type %%$VAR. Enter SET in the command line of any screen to display the SET Command Panel window, as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10 IOA SET Command Panel

Copy
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        SET Command Panel                                          |
|                                                                                   |
|                                                                                   |
|  TRACE level     , ON  (Trace level 001-512, ON or OFF)                           |
|                                                                                   |
|                                                                                   |
|    LANGUAGE              ENG - English                                            |
|                          FRA - French                                             |
|                          GER - German                                             |
|                          JPN - Japanese                                           |
|                                                                                   |
|                                                                                   |
|    SPECIAL CHARACTERS: Dollar     Current representation is "$"(X'5B')            |
|                                                                                   |
|                                                                                   |
| FILL IN PARAMETERS AND PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE OR PF3 TO EXIT                     |
|                                                                                   |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------+   

The process of setting TRACE levels and turning off a particular TRACE, and the process of setting language preferences for online screens and messages, begins in the SET Command Panel.

Using the SET Command Panel to set and end TRACE levels

Setting the TRACE level can help you monitor certain IOA Online facility and INCONTROL functions, such as security checks.

The following steps explain how to set or turn off a TRACE level:

  1. Type a TRACE level number, from 1 through 256, in the TRACE level field of the SETCommand Panel.

  2. In the (Trace level 1-256, ON or OFF) field, type ON to set a TRACE level, or OFF to turn off a TRACE level.

  3. Press Enter to confirm the setting, in which case the following message is displayed:

    CTMA2AI TRACE LEVEL nnn WAS SET xxx

    In this message

    • nnn is the TRACE level number.

    • xxx indicates whether the TRACE level was set ON or turned OFF.

TRACE level settings take effect immediately.

Using the SET Command Panel to set a dollar sign representation

Setting the dollar sign representation influences how System variables are shown in online screens.

The following steps explain how to set the dollar sign representation:

  1. Type a $ character in the Dollar field using your keyboard.

  2. Press Enter to confirm the setting, in which case the following message is displayed:

    Copy
    CTMA2DI THE NEW DOLLAR REPRESENTATION IS "c"(X'yy')

    where

    • c is $ character you set

    • yy is the EBCDIC hexadecimal code for $

There are differences in the EBCDIC hexadecimal code for the $ (dollar sign) character on keyboards that have been adapted to show local or national symbols.

Using the SET Command Panel to set language preferences

Setting the LANGUAGE influences the online screens and messages in subsequent sessions.

The following steps explain how to set language preferences:

  1. In the LANGUAGE field, type one of the following sets of characters to select a language preference:

    • ENG, to set English as the preferred language

    • FRA, to set French as the preferred language

    • GER, to set German as the preferred language

    • JPN, to set Japanese as the preferred language

  2. Press Enter to confirm the setting, in which case the following message is displayed:

    Copy
    CTMA27I THE NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE USED FROM THE NEXT LOGON TO IOA

    Language preference settings do not take effect until your next logon to the system.

Rule Definition Facility

The Control-O Rule Definition facility is composed of a series of screens that enable you to view, create, and modify rule definitions and parameters.

Rule definitions under Control-O are stored in libraries (partitioned data sets). A library contains rule tables (members), and each table contains rules (criteria) for one or more console messages, commands, strings, or events. A table generally contains rules related to a specific topic, such as IPL. Although most sites designate a primary rule definition library, the number of rule definition libraries you can use is unlimited.

The Control-O Rule Definition facility does not support members which have been compressed using the ISPF PACK option.

The number of rule tables in a library, the number of rules in a table, and the size of each rule definition, are all calculated dynamically and are not dependent on parameter specification.

Accessing the Rule Definition Facility

The Rule Definition facility contains the screens shown in Table 27.

Table 27 Rule Definition Facility Screens

Screen

Description

Rule Definition Entry Panel

Allows specification of parameters which determine which screen is displayed.

Table List screen

Displays the list of tables (members) in the specified library.

Rule List screen

Displays the list of rules in a specific rule table.

Rule Definition screen

Displays the parameters of the selected rule. This screen is used to define, display and modify rule parameters.

To enter the Rule Definition facility, select Option OR on the IOA Primary Option menu and press Enter. The entry panel is displayed.

Creating Tables

Tables can be created in any of the following ways:

  • by specifying the new table name in the entry panel and pressing Enter

  • by using the SELECT command (described in Options of the Table List Screen) to specify the new table name in the Table List screen and pressing Enter

As a result of using either of the above methods, a skeletal rule definition (that is, one with most fields left blank) is displayed in the rule definition screen.

Fill in the blanks and save the screen entries. The table is created and the rule definition is the first and only definition in the Rule list of the table. As additional rule definitions are created in the table (described below), they are added to the list.

Upon exiting the Rule List screen, if changes were made in at least one rule definition, an Exit Option window is displayed. One field of the window displays the table name. This value can be changed to a new table name that creates a new table in which the rule definitions are saved.

Creating Rule Definitions

Rule definitions can be created using two basic methods

  • A skeletal rule definition can be created by specifying the name of a new rule definition in the entry panel. The table specified in the entry panel can be either a new or an existing table. In this case, virtually all fields of the rule definition are empty.

  • A copy of an existing rule definition can be created using the INSERT option (described in Options of the Table List Screen in the Rule List screen. In this case, most fields of the new rule definition have the same values as the fields in the copied rule definition.

Performing Operations on Tables and Rules

Many operations can be performed on tables and on the rule definitions in them. These operations are performed using commands and options in the various screens of the Rule Definition facility.

Following is a brief summary of some of the major operations possible within the facility. Additional options and commands are explained following the summary.

Accessing (Editing or Browsing) a Table and its Rules

A table (that is, the rule definitions in the table) can be browsed or edited.

When browsed, the table cannot be modified or updated. When the table is edited, new rule definitions can be added and existing rule definitions can be modified or deleted.

Browsing, however, has the following advantages:

  • Access and exit are quicker than in editing.

  • Rule lists and definitions that are in use by another user can be viewed.

  • Access for browsing might be granted, while though access for editing might be denied due to site security requirements.

To browse a table (and its rule list and rule definitions), use the BROWSE option in the Table List screen.

Specifying the table name in the entry panel or using the SELECT option in the Table List screen provides edit access.

Depending on user profile definitions, if the table requested for editing is in use, access is either granted in Browse mode, or access will not be granted.

Copying a Rule to Another Table

Rules can be copied from one table to another using the COPY option in the Rule List screen. For more information, see Copying Rules to Another Table

Deleting a Table or a Rule

Unneeded rules can be deleted using the DELETE option in the Rule List screen. For more information, see Options of the Table List Screen. Unneeded tables can be deleted using the DELETE option in the Table List screen. For more information, see Deleting Tables.

Ordering Multiple Tables

More than one table at a time can be ordered at one time. To select multiple tables, Tab down in the Tables List screen to each table that you want to select and enter the letter O next to the desired table. Press Enter. A popup confirmation window is displayed, prompting you to choose whether or not to view the confirmation window for each table.

If you choose not to view the confirmation screen before viewing each table (Confirm Y, Ask For Each One N), press Enter.

Saving Modifications

All changes made to a table and its rule scheduling definitions are kept in memory until the table is exited. Upon exiting the table, the user can choose to save or cancel the changes. For more information, see Exiting the Rule Definition Screen.

Entry Panel

Overview

The entry panel is displayed upon entering the Rule Definition facility (Option OR in the IOA Primary Option menu).

Figure 11 Rule Definition Facility Entry Panel

Copy
-------------------- CONTROL-O RULE DEFINITION ENTRY PANEL -----------------(OR)
COMMAND ===>
   
   
   
SPECIFY LIBRARY, TABLE NAME, RULE NAME
   
LIBRARY   ===> CTO.PROD.RULES
TABLE     ===>                      (Blank for table selection list)
RULE      ===>                      (Blank for rule selection list)
   
   
   
   
   
   
SHOW SCHEDULING CRITERIA ===> Y     (Y/N)
   
   
   
   
   
USE THE COMMAND "SHPF" TO SEE PFK ASSIGNMENT                            18.12.28

Fill in entry panel fields LIBRARY, TABLE, and RULE, as described below, to open the desired display. Type Y (Yes) or N (No) in the SHOW SCHEDULING CRITERIA field to determine whether scheduling parameters appear when the Rule Definition screen is displayed.

If you use the selection list fields, their values are not erased until you exit the entry panel by pressing END (PF03/PF15).

To display the list of tables in a library, do the following:

  1. Type the library name.

  2. Leave the table name blank or type the table name using mask characters (* and ?).

  3. Press Enter.

    To display the list of rules for a specific table, do the following:

  4. Type the library name.

  5. Type the table name.

  6. Press Enter.

    If the table does not exist, the screen for defining a new rule is displayed.

    To display the details of a specific rule (Rule Definition screen), do the following:

  7. Type the library name.

  8. Type the table name.

  9. Type the rule name.

  10. Press Enter.

    If the table does not exist, or the rule in the specified table does not exist, the screen for defining a new rule in the table is displayed.

    If you enter the screen for defining a new rule and want to leave the screen without defining a rule, use the CANCEL command.

    To display the Search Window (described below), do the following:

  11. Type the library name.

  12. Type the rule name.

  13. Leave the table name blank or type the table name using mask characters (* or ?).

  14. Press Enter.

    To create a new rule table, do the following:

  15. Type library name.

  16. Specify a new table name.

  17. Press Enter.

    The Rule Definition screen, for defining the first rule in the new table, is displayed.

Search Window

The Search window, illustrated in Figure 12, allows the user to search for the specified rule in tables of the specified library. Tables in which the rule has been found are then displayed in the Table List screen.

Figure 12 Rule Definition Facility Entry Panel Search Window

Copy
-------------------- CONTROL-O RULE DEFINITION ENTRY PANEL -----------------(OR)
COMMAND ===>
SPECIFY LIBRARY, TABLE NAME, RULE NAME
LIBRARY   ===> CTO.PROD.RULES
TABLE     ===>                      (Blank for table selection list)
RULE      ===> CTOSAMPLE            (Blank for rule selection list)
                                      +-----------------------------------------+
                                      |                                         |
                                      |    PLEASE SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:  |
                                      |                                         |
                                      |    1  - STOP SEARCH IMMEDIATELY         |
                                      |    2  - ASK AGAIN AFTER 000010 TABLES   |
      SHOW SCHEDULING CRITERIA ===>   |    3  - UNCONDITIONAL SEARCH            |
                                      |                                         |
                                      |    NUMBER OF TABLES IN LIBRARY:  000015 |
                                      |    NUMBER OF SEARCHED TABLES:    000000 |
                                      |    NUMBER OF SELECTED TABLES:    000000 |
                                      |                                         |
                                     -------------------------------------------+
USE THE COMMAND SHPF TO SEE PFK ASSIGNMENT                             12.11.54

To close the Search Window without performing any action, press PF03/PF15 (END).

To perform a search, select one of the following choices and press Enter:

Copy
3 - UNCONDITIONAL SEARCH

performs an uninterrupted search of all tables in the specified library.

The search is stopped immediately when you select Option 1.

Copy
2 - ASK AGAIN AFTER number TABLES

searches the specified number of tables in the specified library, and then pauses. The search number can be modified. The default is 10.

  • Continue the search by pressing Enter.

  • Stop the search by selecting option 1 (Stop Search Immediately).

If any tables are found, the Table List is displayed listing those tables.

During the search, the following information is displayed at the bottom of the window:

  • Number of tables in library – the total number of tables in the specified library

  • Number of searched tables – the cumulative number of tables searched

    For example, if you perform three searches with a specified number of 10, the figure displayed is 30.

  • Number of selected tables – the cumulative number of tables selected that contain the rule being searched

If any tables are selected during the search, the Table List is displayed listing those tables. If no tables are selected, the Search Window is closed and a message is displayed.

Table List Screen

The Table List screen, which is shown in Figure 13, displays a list of rule tables (members) in the specified library. You can enter this screen from the entry panel or when returning from the Rule List screen.

By default, only table names are listed in the screen. However, if the default has been modified at time of installation, statistical information is displayed with the table name (as shown in Figure 13).

Figure 13 Rule Definition Facility Table List Screen

Copy
TABLES OF LIBRARY CTO.PROD.RULES                               ------------(OR)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  NAME ------------ VV.MM  CREATED     CHANGED     SIZE  INIT   MOD   ID
$HASP             01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    38    38     0 IOAPROD
COMMANDS          01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    24    24     0 IOAPROD
CTD               01.01 00/07/06 00/11/06 12:24     7     6     0 M19A
CTM               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     7     7     0 IOAPROD
CTO               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     6     6     0 IOAPROD
DEVICES           01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    54    54     0 IOAPROD
EVENTS            01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    20    20     0 IOAPROD
IEA               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    32    32     0 IOAPROD
IEC               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     6     6     0 IOAPROD
IEE               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    17    17     0 IOAPROD
IFB               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    32    32     0 IOAPROD
IKT               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    13    13     0 IOAPROD
IMS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    26    26     0 IOAPROD
IOS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    10    10     0 IOAPROD
IST               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     8     8     0 IOAPROD
SHORTCMD          01.01 00/07/06 00/11/02 12:24    21    20     0 M19A
SHUTSYS           01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    19    19     0 IOAPROD
STARTSYS          01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     7     7     0 IOAPROD
STATS             01.00 00/05/11 00/05/11 17:35    40    40     0 CTO514
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   O ORDER   F FORCE   B BROWSE   D DELETE           12.24.50

To scroll down the Table list, press PF08/PF20. To scroll up the Table list, press PF07/PF19.

To return to the entry panel, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Options of the Table List Screen

To request one of the following options, specify the option in the OPT field before the table name, and press Enter.

Table 28 Options of the Table List Screen

Option

Description

S(SELECT)

Display the list of rules in the table for any purpose, including editing and modification. Only one table can be selected at a time.

B(BROWSE)

Display the list of rules in a table for purposes of browsing. Only one table can be selected at a time.

O(ORDER)

Order all rules in the table, provided that their basic scheduling criteria (discussed later in this chapter) are met. Multiple tables can be selected.

F(FORCE)

Order all rules in the table, regardless of the rules’ basic scheduling criteria (discussed later in this chapter). Multiple tables can be selected.

D(DELETE)

Delete the table (member) from the library. Multiple tables can be selected.

The INCONTROL administrator can limit specific users so they can access only the BROWSE option.

When Ordering or Forcing a rule table, if the table is already active under the Control-O monitor, it is replaced by the new copy of the table. All the previous rules of the table are deactivated and replaced by the rules scheduled by the Order or Force.

When ordering a rule table, if no rule has scheduling criteria that are met, the existing table remains in memory, that is, it is not replaced.

After rule tables are loaded by the Control-O monitor, the user can check the results of the loading in the IOA LOG or in the Control-O monitor SYSPRINT.

To return to the entry panel, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Deleting Tables

To delete tables, type D by the table names and press Enter.

The confirmation window shown in Figure 14 is displayed, in sequence, for each table selected for deletion.

Figure 14 Rule Definition Facility Delete Table Confirmation Window

Copy
TABLES OF LIBRARY CTO.PROD.RULES                               ------------(OR)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  NAME ---          +--------------------------+ E  INIT   MOD   ID
$HASP                  |   CONFIRM DELETE OPTION  | 8    38     0 IOAPROD
D   COMMANDS   <-------|               (Y/N)      | 4    24     0 IOAPROD
CTD                    +--------------------------+ 7     6     0 M19A
CTM               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     7     7     0 IOAPROD
CTO               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     6     6     0 IOAPROD
DEVICES           01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    54    54     0 IOAPROD
D   EVENTS            01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    20    20     0 IOAPROD
IEA               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    32    32     0 IOAPROD
IEC               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     6     6     0 IOAPROD
IEE               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    17    17     0 IOAPROD
IEF               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    46    46     0 IOAPROD
IKT               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    13    13     0 IOAPROD
IMS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    26    26     0 IOAPROD
IOS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    10    10     0 IOAPROD
IST               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     8     8     0 IOAPROD
SHORTCMD          01.01 00/07/06 00/11/06 12:24    21    20     0 M19A
SHUTSYS           01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    19    19     0 IOAPROD
STARTSYS          01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     7     7     0 IOAPROD
STATS             01.00 00/05/11 00/05/11 17:35    40    40     0 CTO514
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   O ORDER   F FORCE   B BROWSE   D DELETE           12.24.50
  • Type Y (Yes) in the window to delete the table.

  • Type N (No) in the window to cancel the deletion request.

If the PDSMAN product is operational at your site, $$$SPACE members cannot be deleted.

For each table deleted, a message is written to the IOA Log.

Rule List Screen

The Rule List screen displays the list of rules in a rule table in a specified library. This screen can be entered directly from the entry panel or the Table List screen, or upon returning from the Rule Definition screen.

If the S (Select) option was specified in the Table List screen for a table which is currently in use ("selected") by another user, then depending on the User Profile definition, either the Rule List screen is not displayed (that is, the Table List screen remains displayed; this is the default), or the Rule List screen is displayed in Browse mode. In either case, an appropriate message is displayed.

Figure 15 Rule Definition Rule List Screen

Copy
RULES OF LIBRARY: CTO.PROD.RULES                                TABLE: JOB       
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  RULE     TYP ----------------- DESCRIPTION -------------------------------
S   $HASP100  M  HANDLE ALL 'JOB ON RDR' MESSAGES
    $EJ       C  PROCESS JOB RECYCLING COMMANDS
    $HJ       C  PROCESS HOLD JOB COMMANDS
    $NBLC     S  HANDLE OUT OF BAL\ANCE APPLICATION
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> NO MORE RULES IN THIS TABLE <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ====
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT  C COPY                         18.14.05

Format of the Rule List Screen

Next to each rule name in the Rule list, certain information can be displayed. The type and format of this information depends on whether the screen is displayed in DESC format or in STAT format:

  • In DESC format, the description of the rule, taken from the DESCRIPTION field of the rule definition, is displayed. This is the default.

  • In STAT format, the ISPF-like statistical information relating to the rule is displayed.

To change formats, use the DESC or STAT commands. To change the order in which the rules are displayed in the Rule List screen, use the SORT command. For more information about these commands, see Table 30 Commands of the Rule List Screen. Table 29 lists the Rule Types and their descriptions.

Table 29 Rule Definition Facility Rule Types

Type

Description

M

Message

S

String

C

Command

P

Control-M/Links for Windows NT MESSAGE

E

Event

L

Rule

R

Job arrival

X

Job end

D

Data set

4

OMEGAMON exception interface

Z

Step

B

SMS Allocation event

V

MAINVIEW ALARM event

5

ON SYSOUT

Commands of the Rule List Screen

The commands in Table 30 can be entered in the COMMAND field of the Rule List screen.

Table 30 Commands of the Rule List Screen

Command

Description

DESC

The DESC command displays the rule description next to the rule name. The description is taken from the DESCRIPTION field in the rule.

STAT

The STAT command displays the following ISPF-like statistical information next to the rule names:

  • the creation date

  • the last modification date

  • the version and modification numbers

  • the userID

SORT

sorts the list of rules in the Rule List screen according to specified criteria. Valid values are:

  • R (rule) - Sorted according to rule name

  • T (type) - Sorted according to rule type

Options of the Rule List Screen

Use one of the rule options shown in Table 31 by specifying the option before the rule name and pressing Enter.

Table 31 Options of the Rule List Screen

Option

Description

S (SELECT)

Display the Rule Definition screen which contains details of the specific rule.

If the Rule Definition screen is displayed in Browse mode, the rule definition can only be browsed; it cannot be modified. If the Rule Definition screen is not displayed in Browse mode, the rule definition can be edited and updated.

D (DELETE)

Delete a rule from the Rule list.

I (INSERT)

Insert a new rule in the list. The Rule Definition screen appears, with the same parameter values as the rule marked I.

C (COPY)

Copy the rule to another table (described below). Multiple rules can be selected.

If the Rule List screen is displayed in Browse mode, options D (Delete) and I (Insert) are not available.

Copying Rules to Another Table

To copy one or more rules from the current table to another table, type C (Copy) by the rules names in the Rule List screen and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure 16 is displayed.

Figure 16 Rule List Screen Copy Window

Copy
RULES OF LIBRARY: CTO.PROD.RULES                                TABLE: EXIT
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  RULE       TYP------------- DESCRIPTION -------------------------------
     EXIT        E EXIT    EXIT 000 
     EXITMSG1    E EXIT    EXIT 001
     EXITMSG2    E EXIT    EXIT 002
     EXITMSG3    E EXIT    EXIT 003
     EXITMSG4 +-----------------------------------------------------------+
     EXITMSG5 |                                                           |
 C   EXITMSG6 |     SPECIFY DESTINATION LIBRARY,TABLE AND RULE NAME       |
     EXITMSG7 |                                                           |
     EXITMSG8 |  LIBRARY :  CTO.PROD.RULES                                |
     EXITMSG9 |  TABLE   :                                                |
     EXITMSG0 |  RULE    :  EXITMSG0                                      |
     EXITMSGA |                                                           |
     EXITMSGB |  PRESS END/RESET TO CANCEL     ENTER TO PERFORM THE COPY  |
     EXITMSGC +-----------------------------------------------------------+
     EXITMSGD    E EXIT    EXIT 00D
     EXITMSGE    E EXIT    EXIT 00E
     EXITMSGF    E EXIT    EXIT 00F
     EXITMSGG    E EXIT    EXIT 00G
     EXITMSGH    E EXIT    EXIT 00H
     EXITMSGI    E EXIT    EXIT 00I
 OPTIONS S SELECT D DELETE I INSERT C COPY                               15.37.39

The window contains the fields in Table 32. Some fields contain default values which can be modified.

Table 32 Fields of the Rule List Screen Copy Window

Field

Description

LIBRARY

Library containing the table into which the rule should be copied. Must be an existing library. Default: the current library

TABLE

Name of the table into which the rule should be copied.

A rule can only be copied to another table. It cannot be copied to its own table (even if the rule is renamed).

If the specified table does not exist, the table is created when the request is performed.

RULE

Name of the rule to be copied. If multiple rules are selected, the window is first displayed with the first selected rule. As each request is preformed or canceled, the next requested rule name appears.

  • To perform a request, press Enter.

  • To cancel a request, press PF03/PF15 (END) or PF04/PF16 (RESET).

Rule Definition Screen

This screen is used to define, display and modify various rule parameters (such as those for a message, string, command, or event). The rule parameters determine Control-O selection and action management. This screen can be entered directly from the entry panel or from the Rule List screen.

The rule parameters may take up more than one screen.

For a detailed explanation of each rule parameter, see Rule Parameters

Parameters marked with the symbol M can have multiple occurrences. Whenever you fill in the last occurrence of the parameter on the screen, Control-O adds a new empty occurrence of the parameter that can be filled in. The only limit to the number of occurrences is the region size available for the application.

To delete a parameter on the screen, erase it (press the EOF key, or blank it out). If additional operations are required, Control-O issues appropriate instructions.

The rule parameters are divided into the following basic groups:

Figure 17 Rule Definition Screen

Copy
RL: $HASP100   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
  ON MESSAGE  = $HASP100                                                     
     JNAME PROD*    JTYPE J       SMFID        SYSTEM                        
ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                       
APPEARED     TIMES IN      MINUTES                          And/Or/Not
OWNER SYS3     GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION JES2 JOB ON RDR MESSAGE SUPPRESSION
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
/* SUPPRESS THE MESSAGE
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          
SYSTEM                                                                
DO
=========================================================================== 
                          D O   O P T I O N S                               
Askoper  - Ask operator             COMmand  - Issue operator command      
CONd     - Add/delete IOA condition CTD req  - O/F CONTROl-D mission       
CTOPcmsg - Message to CONTROL-O/PC  DISplay  - Message / Command control   
DOm      - Delete operator messag   FOrcejob - Force job under CONTROL-M   
Ksl      - Activate a KOA script    RESource - Change IOA resources        
RUle     - Call another RULE        SEt      - Set CONTROL-O/IOA variable  
SHEll    - Run a z/OS shell script  SHout    - Notification facility       
SMSClass - Set a new SMS class      SMSMsg   - Issue message by SMS ACS    
SNmp     - Send SNMP Trap message   STopjob  - Stop next job steps         
SYsreq   - System request           Tso      - Activate TSO command        
WAit     - Completion of events     >        - Open a new DO line          
/* -PF16 - Add comment line         />       - Comment/Uncomment "DO"      
If / ELse / ENDIf / ENDMsg / WHile / ENDWhile - Logical instructions       
EXit / RETurn / TERminat                      - End Process Instructions   
========================================================================== 
DAYS                                                          DCAL
                                                                         AND/OR
WDAYS   ALL                                                   WCAL
MONTHS  1- Y 2- Y 3- Y 4- Y 5- Y 6- Y 7- Y 8- Y 9- Y 10- Y 11- Y 12- Y
DATES
CONFCAL          SHIFT
ENVIRONMENT SMFID      SYSTEM              
===========================================================================
IN
TIME FROM      UNTIL           INTERVAL      PRIORITY     CONTINUE SEARCH Y
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END OF RULE DEFINITION PARAMETERS <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
FILL IN RULE DEFINITION. CMDS: EDIT, SCHED, OPT, SHPF                  06.44.34

Display and Non-Display of Scheduling Criteria

When N (No) has been typed in the Show Scheduling Criteria field of the Rule Definition Entry Panel, the Basic and Runtime Scheduling parameters are hidden. In the screen illustrated in Figure 18, the Automated Console Action parameters (DO OPTIONS) are also hidden.

Figure 18 Non-Display of Scheduling Criteria

Copy
RL: $HASP100   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
ON MESSAGE  = $HASP100                                                     
JNAME PROD*    JTYPE J       SMFID        SYSTEM                        
ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                       
APPEARED     TIMES IN      MINUTES                          And/Or/Not
OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC       
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION JES2 JOB ON RDR MESSAGE SUPPRESSION
DESCRIPTION
==========================================================================
/* SUPPRESS THE MESSAGE
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          
SYSTEM                                                                
DO
===========================================================================
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END OF RULE DEFINITION PARAMETERS <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
FILL IN RULE DEFINITION. CMDS: EDIT, SCHED, OPT, SHPF                  06.44.34

Typing the SCHED command (abbreviated to SC) in the COMMAND field alternately displays or hides the rule scheduling parameters (independently of the Show Scheduling Criteria field in the Rule Definition Entry Panel).

If you are not using the scheduling options of Control-O, you should work with N (No) as the default.

Scheduling criteria apply to a rule even when they are hidden.

Message/Event Selection Parameters

Message/Event Selection parameters specify selection conditions that must be fulfilled before Control-O will perform designated actions.

Figure 19 shows a typical screen with Message Event Selection parameters.

Figure 19 Message Event Selection Parameters

Copy
RL: $HASP100   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
ON MESSAGE  = $HASP100                                                     
JNAME          JTYPE         SMFID        SYSTEM                        
ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                       
APPEARED     TIMES IN      MINUTES                          And/Or/Not  
OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC       
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION JES2 'JOB ON RDR' MESSAGE SUPPRESSION                       
DESCRIPTION                                                                
===========================================================================
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          
SYSTEM                                                               

Table 33 shows the options available when setting the ON parameter.

Table 33 ON Parameter Options

Parameter

Description

ON

Specifies the conditions under which the rule is to be performed.

An ON statement is comprised of the ON field and the optional parameters listed below. At least one ON statement is required. Additional ON statements can be specified using the And/Or/Not option described below.

Type one of the following options or abbreviations in the ON field and press Enter. Specify a value for the selected option, and specify values as indicated for any additional subparameters.

  • CO (COMMAND) – any operator command entered on the console

  • CT (CTOPCMSG – message issued by Control-M/Links for Windows NT

  • D (DSNEVENT) – name (or mask) of the job to be monitored for data set events

The rule is performed when data set disposition is performed by MVS, for specified data sets, at deallocation time during step termination or dynamic deallocation. Data set name and disposition are specified in subparameters.

  • E (EVENT) – Event identifier from 1 through 8 characters in length. Use of an ON EVENT statement indicates that Control-O will use only the Runtime Scheduling criteria to determine whether or not to perform an action. For example, issue a command every hour.

  • JA (JOBARRIV) – Job name (or mask). The rule is performed when a job or started task arrives on the JES spool from any source.

Jobs submitted by a TSO user, jobs submitted by CICS, and jobs received over an NJE network.

ON

(continued)

  • JE (JOBEND) – Job name (or mask). The rule is performed when a job or started task terminates.

  • M (MESSAGE) – Message identifier (ID) from 1 through 10 characters in length.

  • MV (MVALARM) – MAINVIEW alarm exception code (or mask) issued by MAINVIEW ALARM (a BMC product.)

  • OM (OMEGAEXP) – Exception code (or mask) issued by an OMEGAMON monitor. The rule is triggered when the specified exception code is issued from the specified OMEGAMON monitor.

  • R (RULE) – Rule identifier (name) from 1 through 8 characters in length. Use of an ON RULE statement indicates that the specified rule is performed only when it is invoked by a DO RULE statement which is part of another rule.

  • SMS – SMS (Storage Management System) data set allocation event. When a new data set is allocated, SMS calls three Automatic Class Selection (ACS) routines that set the data, management, and storage classes of the data set. The rule is triggered when the ACS routine is called.

  • STE (STEP) – Name or mask of the job to be monitored for the completion of a specified step. The rule is performed when the specified step of the specified job is completed.

  • STR (STRING) – Message text to be intercepted by Control-O. The search for the specified string can be limited to a FROM and TO column range, using the COL subparameter.

  • SYSOUT – Message text issued to a SYSOUT DDstream. The rule is triggered when the message is issued.

ON

(continued)

The first ten characters of the value specified for the selected options will appear as the name of the rule in the Rule List and Rule Status screens.

Mask characters (* and ?) can be used when specifying values for all ON selection options except ON EVENT and ON RULE.

Control-O AutoEdit variables can be specified and are resolved during rule ordering. For more information, see ON Statement: Message/Event Selection Parameter.

Table 34 shows the And/Or/Not subparameter that is displayed for all types of ON statements except ON EVENT and ON RULE.

Table 34 ON Statement And/Or/Not Subparameter

Subparameter

Description

And/Or/Not

Conjunctional parameter for linking ON statements.

Specifying A (And), O (Or), or N (Not) opens a new ON statement and links the new statement to the line containing the A/O/N specification.

ON MESSAGE -

OR

ON COMMAND

ON DSNEVENT  JOBA  STEPA

OR

ON DSNEVENT  JOBA  STEPB

When specifying multiple ON statements, ensure that the statements are not mutually exclusive or not connected by an AND parameter.

Rules containing mutually exclusive ON statements connected by an AND parameter will never be triggered.

ON MESSAGE, ON STRING, ON COMMAND and ON CTOPCMSG Subparameters

Figure 20 shows the unique subparameters that are displayed for the following types of ON statements:

  • MESSAGE

  • STRING

  • COMMAND

  • CTOPCMSG

These subparameters cannot contain AutoEdit symbols.

Figure 20 Unique Subparameters for ON MESSAGE, ON STRING, ON COMMAND, ON CTOPCMSG

Copy
RL: $HASP263   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
ON MESSAGE  = $HASP263                                                      
JNAME          JTYPE         SMFID        SYSTEM
ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID 01 CONSOLE
APPEARED 006   TIMES IN 0003 MINUTES                        And/Or/Not  
OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC       
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION JES CHECKPOINT CONTENTION PROBLEM HANDLING      
DESCRIPTION                                                                
===========================================================================
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER2             URGENCY R SYSTEM CTO282I
MESSAGE JES CHECKPOINT CONTENTION PROBLEM -- PLEASE CHECK

Table 35 shows these unique subparameters, together with descriptions of each of them.

Table 35 Unique Subparameters for ON MESSAGE, ON STRING, ON COMMAND, ON CTOPCMSG

Subparameter

Description

JNAME

Name of the job that issues the message. Mask characters (* and ?) are supported.

JTYPE

Job type that issues the message.

SMFID

SMF ID of the CPU on which the message or command is issued.

SYSTEM

Name of the system from which the message or command originated. Mask characters (* and ?) are supported.

ROUTE

Route code of the message.

DESC

Descriptor code of the message.

CONSOLEID

Console ID to which the message is issued or on which the operator command is entered.

CONSOLE

Name of the console on which the message is displayed. Mask characters (* and ?) are supported.

APPEARED n TIMES IN m MINUTES

Number of times the message must appear within a specified number of minutes before the rule is triggered.

ON DSNEVENT and ON STEP Subparameters

Figure 21 shows the screen displayed when ON DSNEVENT is entered in the ON statement field.

Figure 21 Unique Subparameters for ON DSNEVENT and ON STEP Statements

Copy
RL: PRDJ0003   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
ON DSNEVENT = PRDJ0003 JTYPE   SMFID    SYSTEM
DSN      PROD.*                                       DISP CATLG
PROCSTEP            PGMSTEP            STEPRC OK            And/Or/Not
OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC   
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION NEW DATASET CREATED - TRIGGER A BACKUP JOB
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================

Table 36 shows the subparameters that are displayed for ON DSNEVENT or ON STEP statements. These subparameters cannot contain AutoEdit symbols.

Table 36 Unique Subparameters for ON DSNEVENT and ON STEP Statements

Subparameter

Description

jobname

Name (or mask) of the job to be monitored for data set events.

JTYPE

Job type which issues the message.

SMFID

SMF ID of the CPU to monitor for data set events. Mask characters (* and ?) are supported.

SYSTEM

Name of the system to monitor for data set events. Mask characters (* and ?) are supported.

DSN

Name of data set (or masks) to be monitored.

DISP

Data set disposition.

PROCSTEP

Procedure step name (or mask) to be monitored for this event within the selected jobs.

PGMSTEP

Program step name (or mask) to be monitored for this event within the selected jobs.

STEPRC

Completion code of the step which is monitored.

General Parameters

The parameters shown in Figure 22 are used to provide general information about the rule and to determine the mode in which the rule is processed.

Figure 22 General Parameters

Copy
ON EVENT    = CNDRIVEN
OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC
THRESHOLD
DESCRIPTION EVENT RULE TRIGGERED EACH TIME THE CONDITION IS ADDED
DESCRIPTION
       ===========================================================================

Table 37 General Parameters

Parameter

Description

OWNER

ID of a user who requests Control-O services (used for security purposes, documentation purposes, and for selection in the Show Option window in the Rule Status screen).

GROUP

Name of a group of rules.

MODE

Rule operation method. Determines whether or not a trace is issued, and whether or not commands are actually executed.

RUNTSEC

Type of runtime security checks to be carried out on the rule.

DESCRIPTIONM

Free text description of the rule definition. The first line appears as the description of the rule in the Rule List screen. The first 20 characters appear in the rule’s description in the Rule Status screen. This parameter is not a selection parameter.

Automated Console Action Parameters: DO Statement

Automated Console Action parameters (DO statements) specify actions to be performed by Control-O. These actions are performed only after conditions specified in the Message/Event Selection parameters have been fulfilled.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
======================================================================
DO

At least one DO statement must be specified in a rule. Note that the DO IF, DO ELSE and DO ENDIF statements provide Boolean "IF" logic capability, allowing for alternative actions to be performed. Repetition logic is provided using the DO WHILE and DO ENDWHILE statements.

To insert an "empty" DO between two existing DO lines, type the > character over the first letter in the DO field of the first line (for example, DO >OMMAND), and press Enter.

To delete a DO statement, place the cursor on the first letter in the DO field and press the EOF key on your keyboard or blank the field.

A list of allowable DO options is displayed under the Automated Console Action parameters section of the Rule Definition screen. The OPTLIST command can be used to alternately hide or display this list. For more information, see "OPTLIST" in Commands of the Rule Definition Screen.

DOM Options

The following are a description and example of each of the DO statement options.

DO ASKOPER – Issue a WTOR (Write to Operator with Reply) message.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
==========================================================================
DO ASKOPER  = HAVE YOU NOTIFIED SHIFT SUPERVISOR ? REPLY 'YES' OR 'NO'
ROUTE       CONSOLEID 01 CONSOLE                           TIMEOUT 0030
DO

DO COMMAND – Issue a specified MVS, VTAM or MVS subsystem operator command.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO COMMAND  = D A,CICSPROD
   WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM
   WAITMODE   Y             WAITRESP Y            TIMEOUT
   RESPMSG
DO

DO COND – Add or delete a prerequisite condition. Prerequisite conditions are used to trigger events in Control-O or other INCONTROL products.

Copy
DESCRIPTION SIGNAL CONTROL-M THAT DB2 IS ACTIVE (AND NOT DOWN)
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO COND     = DB2-IS-ACTIVE        STAT +   DB2-IS-DOWN           STAT -

DO CTD REQ – Order or Force Control-D mission request.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO CTD REQ  = MISSION MIS1     CAT                      DATE ODAT   FORCE Y
                LIBRARY LIB1                                              

DO CTOPCMSG – Specify a message to be sent to Control-M/Links for Windows NT.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER2             URGENCY  R          SYSTEM CTO282I82I
   MESSAGE NON-CORRECTABLE I/O ERR ON MVSRES (UNIT=230). PAGE TECH-SUPPORT
DO CTOPCMSG = PAGE SYSPROG DATA-CHECK ON MVSRES (UNIT=230)
DO

DO DISPLAY – Control the display of the message on the console, or control the execution of a command.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
=========================================================================== 
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID 01 CONSOLE
   SYSTEM                                                                  
   NEWTEXT
DO

DO DOM – Delete a highlighted, unrollable message from the display.

Copy
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS N ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE         
   SYSTEM                                                               
   NEWTEXT PLEASE MOUNT TAPE S89542 ON UNIT 480
DO SET      = %%NEWDOMID=%%$LDOMID                                 GLOBAL  N
DO WAIT     = REPLY                DOM Y             TIMEOUT 9999
   MESSAGE
DO DOM      = %%NEWDOMID
DO

DO ENDMSG – Delimit DO statements which are processed during message interception in command-response mode or for multi-line messages.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO SET      = %%JSTAT = INACTIVE                                  GLOBAL  N
DO COMMAND  = D A,CICSPROD                                            
   WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM                
   WAITMODE   Y             WAITRESP Y            TIMEOUT          
   RESPMSG                                                         
IF       %%$W2 %%$M* EQ CICSPROD
DO SET      = %%JSTAT = ACTIVE                                    GLOBAL  N
ENDIF
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS A ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE         
   SYSTEM                                                               
   NEWTEXT
ENDMSG
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
   MESSAGE JOB CICSPROD IS %%JSTAT
DO

DO EXIT – Exit from a multi-line message block or a DO WHILE block.

Copy
===========================================================================
DO SET      = %%$MLLEND=NO                                        GLOBAL  N
DO COMMAND  = $DA                                              
   WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM                       
   WAITMODE   Y             WAITRESP Y            TIMEOUT                 
   RESPMSG $HASP890     $HASP612                                          
IF       %%$MSGID EQ $HASP612                                             
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEM          CTO282I      
   MESSAGE SYSTEM IS IDLE                                                 
EXIT     MESSAGE                                                          
DO                                                                        
ENDIF                                                                     
ENDMSG                                                                    
DO                                                                        
===========================================================================

DO FORCEJOB – Force a job under Control-M.

Copy
=========================================================================== 
      DO FORCEJOB = TABLE   SMF      JOB CLEANSMF  UFLOW N    DATE ODAT
                    LIBRARY CTM.PROD.SCHEDULE                               
      DO

DO IF / DO ELSE / DO ENDIF – Provide Boolean "IF" logic capability allowing for alternative actions to be performed. Nesting levels can be displayed or hidden using the SHOWNEST command, described in SHOWNEST Command

Copy
===========================================================================
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE   
   SYSTEM                                                         
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
   MESSAGE TSO IS BEING SHUT DOWN. SHIFT SUPERVISOR MUST BE NOTIFIED.
DO SET      = %%RC = 4                                            GLOBAL  N
   WHILE    %%RC NE# 0
DO ASKOPER  = HAVE YOU NOTIFIED SHIFT SUPERVISOR?  REPLY 'YES' OR 'CANCEL'
   ROUTE       CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                          TIMEOUT 0030
IF       (%%$ASKRC EQ# 4) AND ((%%$RPLYTXT EQ YES) OR (%%$RPLYTXT EQ CANCEL))
DO SET      = %%RC = 0                                            GLOBAL  N
   ENDIF
   ENDWHILE
   IF       %%$RPLYTXT EQ YES
DO COMMAND  = P TSO                                         
   WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM       
   WAITMODE   N
ELSE
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
   MESSAGE ACTION CANCELED
ENDIF
DO

DO KSL – Execute a KeyStroke OpenAccess (KOA) script.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO SET      = %%FILENAME = FILE01                                 GLOBAL  N
DO SET      = %%FILESTAT = UNKNOWN                                GLOBAL  N
DO KSL      = CICSINQ %%FILENAME
   WAITMODE   Y                                      TIMEOUT         STOP Y
   INITPROC   CICSP          SHARELOC Y              IMMEDIATE Y

DO RESOURCE – Change the quantity of a Quantitative resource.

Copy
DESCRIPTION                                                                 
=========================================================================== 
DO RESOURCE = TAPE                 0001 +                                   
DO                                                                          
===========================================================================  

DO RETURN – Exit from the rule and return to the caller.

Copy
=========================================================================== 
IF       %%$V2 EQ  ''AAUTCNMI''                                           
DO SET      = %%STATUS_NLDM = UP                                  GLOBAL  Y
RETURN                                                                    
ENDIF                                                                     
IF       %%$V2 EQ  ''BNJDSERV''                                           
DO SET      = %%STATUS_NPDA = UP                                  GLOBAL  Y
ENDIF                                                                     
DO                                                                        
=========================================================================== 

DO RULE – Invoke another rule from within the current rule.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO RULE     = GENALERT %%$JOBNAME %%ABEND                    OWNER  IOAADMIN
   TABLE               LIBRARY
DO
===========================================================================

DO SET – Assign a value to an AutoEdit variable.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
=========================================================================== 
DO SET      = %%IMS1_REPLY_ID = %%$REPLY                           GLOBAL  Y 
DO                                                                          
=========================================================================== 

DO SHELL – Run a z/OS shell script

Copy
DESCRIPTION
=========================================================================== 
DO SHELL    = /u/m66/myscript.ch                                            
   WAITMODE   N                                      TIMEOUT         STOP Y
   SHARELOC   N                                      IMMEDIATE N            
DO SHOUT   = TO OPER                    URGENCY R SYSTEM          CTO282I 
   MESSAGE Z/OS SCRIPT myscript.ch ENDED WITH RC=%%$SHELLRC  
DO
===========================================================================

DO SHOUT – Issue a message to a console, TSO user, ROSCOE user, IOA Log or Info/Management using the notification facility.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
=========================================================================== 
DO SHOUT    = TO TSO-DBA           URGENCY U SYSTEM                       CTO282I
   MESSAGE DB2 MASTER ABENDED - PLEASE CHECK!                              
DO                                                                          
===========================================================================

DO SMSCLASS – Assign an SMS class name to a new data set.

Copy
=========================================================================== 
DO SMSCLASS = ID 01 CLASS SMS_CLASS_01                                      
DO                                                                          
=========================================================================== 

DO SMSMSG – Define a message to be displayed in the job log for a new data set.

Copy
=========================================================================== 
DO SMSMSG   = ID 1  MESSAGE SMS MESSAGE                                     
DO                                                                          
=========================================================================== 

DO STOPJOB – Stop the execution of the next steps of the job under which the rule is executing.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
=========================================================================== 
DO STOPJOB
DO
===========================================================================

DO SYSREQ – Execute system programmer requests.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===============================================================================
DO SYSREQ   = ENQINFO    STATUS OWNER      SCOPE ALL       JOBNAME
   QNAME      SYSDSN     RNAME %%DSNAME
DO

DO TERMINAT – Terminate the process of the triggering rule, and all called rules (if any), and continue to the next rule.

Copy
ON EVENT    = TERMINAT                                                     
OWNER N18A     GROUP                         MODE LOG     RUNTSEC          
THRESHOLD                                                                  
DESCRIPTION                                                                
===========================================================================
DO SET      = %%A=BEFORE CALL                                     GLOBAL  N
DO RULE     = TERMINAT                                      OWNER          
   TABLE               LIBRARY                                             
   SYSTEM              SHARELOC       TIMEOUT                              
DO SET      = %%A=AFTER CALL                                      GLOBAL  N
DO    
ON RULE     = TERMINAT                                                     
OWNER N18A     GROUP                         MODE LOG     RUNTSEC          
THRESHOLD                                                                  
DESCRIPTION                                                                
===========================================================================
DO SET      = %%A=CALLED RULE                                     GLOBAL  N
TERMINAT                                                                   
DO SET      = %%A=AFTER TERMINAT                                  GLOBAL  N
DO

DO TSO – Perform a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX procedure.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO TSO      = LISTALC
   WAITMODE   Y                                      TIMEOUT         STOP Y
   INITPROC                  SHARELOC                IMMEDIATE N
DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
   MESSAGE CLIST LISTALC ENDED WITH RC=%%$TSORC    DESCRIPTION
DO

DO WAIT – Delay subsequent action until any of the specified events is completed.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS N ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE      
   SYSTEM                                                            
   NEWTEXT PLEASE MOUNT TAPE S89542 ON UNIT 480
DO SET      = %%NEWDOMID=%%$LDOMID                                GLOBAL  N
DO WAIT     = REPLY                DOM Y             TIMEOUT 9999
   MESSAGE
DO DOM      = %%NEWDOMID
DO

DO WHILE / DO ENDWHILE – Provide repetition (loop) logic capability so that other DO actions can be performed repeatedly.

Nesting levels can be displayed or hidden using command SHOWNEST described in SHOWNEST Command.

Copy
DESCRIPTION
===========================================================================
  DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE      
     SYSTEM                                                            
  DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
     MESSAGE TSO IS BEING SHUT DOWN. SHIFT SUPERVISOR MUST BE NOTIFIED.
  DO SET      = %%RC = 4                                            GLOBAL  N
 WHILE    %%RC NE# 0
  DO ASKOPER  = HAVE YOU NOTIFIED SHIFT SUPERVISOR?  REPLY 'YES' OR 'CANCEL'
     ROUTE       CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                          TIMEOUT 0030
 IF       (%%$ASKRC EQ# 4) AND ((%%$RPLYTXT EQ YES) OR (%%$RPLYTXT EQ CANCEL))
  DO SET      = %%RC = 0                                            GLOBAL  N
 ENDIF
 ENDWHILE
 IF       %%$RPLYTXT EQ YES
  DO COMMAND  = P TSO                                         
     WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM       
     WAITMODE   N
 ELSE
  DO SHOUT    = TO OPER              URGENCY R SYSTEMCTO282I
     MESSAGE ACTION CANCELED
 ENDIF
  DO

Basic Scheduling Parameters

Control-O Basic Scheduling parameters specify on what dates the rule is a candidate for activation on a daily basis. The rule is "ordered" (that is, its basic scheduling criteria are checked; if fulfilled, the rule is ready to be activated — placed in the active Control-O monitor environment). However, it is not activated until Runtime Scheduling and Message/Event criteria have been fulfilled.

Use of the Basic Scheduling parameters is optional and is usually performed by advanced Control-O users. The "Show Scheduling Criteria" field of the entry panel manages the display of Basic and Runtime Scheduling parameters on the Rule Definition screen. It is also possible to control this feature from the Rule Definition screen. Type SCHED (or SC) in the command area and press Enter to alternate between display or non-display of the scheduling parameters.

Figure 23 shows the Basic Scheduling Parameters section of the Rule Definition screen.

Figure 23 Basic Scheduling Parameters

Copy
===========================================================================
DAYS                                                          DCAL         
                                                                    AND/OR  
WDAYS   ALL                                                   WCAL         
MONTHS  1- Y 2- Y 3- Y 4- Y 5- Y 6- Y 7- Y 8- Y 9- Y 10- Y 11- Y 12- Y     
DATES                                                                      
CONFCAL          SHIFT                                                     
ENVIRONMENT SMFID      SYSTEM                                              
===========================================================================

Table 38 shows the basic scheduling parameters, together with explanations of each of them.

Table 38 Basic Scheduling Parameters

Parameter

Description

DAYS

Days of the month to schedule the rule. A maximum of two lines can be specified.

The subparameters of the DAYS parameter are:

  • DCAL — DAYS calendar specification.

  • AND/OR — Conjunctional parameter which links the DAYS and WDAYS parameters.

WDAYS

Days of the week to schedule the rule. A maximum of two lines can be specified. WDAYS has the following subparameter:

  • WCAL — WDAYS calendar specification.

MONTHS

Months to order the rule.

DATES

Specific dates in the year to order the rule.

CONFCAL

Name of a calendar used for rule scheduling confirmation. CONFCAL has the following subparameter:

  • SHIFT — Indicates if and when a rule should be scheduled when it fails confirmation by the CONFCAL calendar.

ENVIRONMENT

Environment in which the rule should be loaded.

The subparameters of the ENVIRONMENT parameter are:

  • SMFID — SMF ID of the system in which the rule should be loaded.

  • SYSTEM — Name of the system in which the rule should be loaded.

Runtime Scheduling Parameters

Control-O Runtime Scheduling parameters specify runtime scheduling conditions under which actions are performed by Control-O. Control-O does not scan for messages and commands unless all runtime parameters are fulfilled. For example, special network status monitoring is activated only during heavy data transmission.

Figure 24 shows the Runtime Scheduling parameters section of the Rule Definition screen.

Figure 24 Runtime Scheduling Parameters

Copy
===========================================================================
IN        IMS-ABEND            0101
TIME FROM 2200 UNTIL 0600      INTERVAL      PRIORITY 99  CONTINUE SEARCH Y
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END OF RULE DEFINITION PARAMETERS <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ====

Commands of the Rule Definition Screen

Table 39 shows the commands, other than the /> command, that can be specified in the COMMAND field of the Rule Definition screen.

Table 39 Commands of the Rule Definition Screen

Command

Description

EDIT

The EDIT command alternately enters and exits the Edit environment of the Rule Definition screen. The Edit environment provides ISPF-like line editing commands to the Rule Definition screen. For more information, see Editing Rule Definitions in the IOA Edit Environment

SHPF

The SHPF command shows the current PFKey assignments.

SCHED

The SCHED command (abbreviated SC) alternately displays or hides the rule scheduling parameters (independent of the Show Scheduling Criteria field).

OPTLIST

The OPTLIST command (abbreviated OPT or O) alternately displays or hides the list of allowable Automated Console Action parameters (DO OPTIONS).

SHOWNEST

The SHOWNEST command (abbreviated SH) alternately displays or hides level numbers for DO statement nesting, relative to the nesting level of DO IF, DO ELSE and DO ENDIF statements, and DO WHILE and DO ENDWHILE statements.

/>

The /> command comments out a DO statement in a Control-O rule definition. To comment out a statement, type /> over the first two letters of the statement name (for example, for a DO COMMAND statement type /> over the CO in command), and press Enter. The entire statement is commented out.

Valid formats of the /> command are:

  • /> OFF — The commented-out DO statement is hidden.

  • /> ON — The commented-out DO statement is displayed. Default.

  • /> — indicates whether /> ON or /> OFF mode is active

For more information, see Commenting Out Rule Statements.

CAPS

By default, all entries of lowercase characters are converted and saved as uppercase. In Control-O rules, certain fields (such as the string entered in the ON STRING field) can be enabled to accept and save lowercase characters, by using the CAPS OFF command.

Valid formats of the CAPS command are:

  • CAPS OFF — enables certain user entries to be saved and displayed in lowercase characters

  • CAPS ON — forces all user entries to be displayed in uppercase characters, regardless of the case in which they were entered. Default.

  • CAPS — indicates whether CAPS ON or CAPS OFF mode is active

JCL jobs used by Control-M do not support lowercase characters. BMC recommends that you do not use lowercase characters to define Control-O variables if those variables are shared by Control-M through IOAVAR.

/*

The /* command enables the user to insert a comment into the Action section of the Rule Definition screen.

Valid formats of the /* command are:

  • /* OFF — The comment line is hidden.

  • /* ON — The comment line is displayed. Default.

  • /* — indicates whether /* ON or /* OFF mode is active

For more information, see the section immediately below, Specifying Comments.

Specifying Comments

Comments are free text descriptions of rule definition parameters that are stored in a rule definition member. BMC recommends that you insert comments within rule definitions for clarification and documentation purposes. Comments are not processed during rule execution.

To insert a comment, position the cursor at the line before which the comment should be inserted, and press CMNT (PF04/PF16). A comment line is opened beginning with the symbol /*. To insert additional lines, fill in the current line and press Enter.

Comments can also be inserted by either typing the CMNT command in the COMMAND field and moving the cursor to the line before which the comment should be inserted and pressing Enter, or by typing /* on an empty DO statement and pressing Enter.

The Rule Definition screen shown in Figure 25 illustrates comment usage.

Figure 25 Illustration of Rule Definition Comment Usage

Copy
RL: CANCEL *   LIB CTO.PROD.RULES                               TABLE: JOB
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
  ON COMMAND  = CANCEL *                                                     
     JNAME CONSOLE  JTYPE         SMFID        SYSTEM       USERID
     ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID 01 CONSOLE                     
   APPEARED     TIMES IN      MINUTES                          And/Or/Not  
  OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC       
  THRESHOLD
  DESCRIPTION ASK FOR OPERATOR'S CONFIRMATION OF SENSITIVE COMMANDS          
  DESCRIPTION                                                                
  ===========================================================================
  /* SUPPRESS ORIGINAL COMMAND                                               
  DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS Y ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE    
     SYSTEM                                                          
  /* ASK OPERATOR FOR CONFIRMATION                                           
  WHILE    %%$RPLYTXT NE YES AND %%$RPLYTXT NE NOT                             
  DO ASKOPER  = ENTER "YES" OR "NOT" FOR CONFIRMATION                        
  ROUTE       CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                          TIMEOUT   
  ENDWHILE                                                                   
  /* UPON CONFIRMATION, RE-ISSUE THE ORIGINAL COMMAND                        
  IF       %%$RPLYTXT EQ YES                                                  
  DO COMMAND  = %%$CMD    
     WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM                  
     WAITMODE   N                                                            
  ENDIF                                                                      
  DO                                                                         
FILL IN RULE DEFINITION. CMDS: EDIT, SCHED, OPT, SHPF                  14.51.58

An unlimited number of comment lines can be specified in a rule definition.

Control-O line editing commands, similar to ISPF line commands, can be performed on comment lines. For more information, see Editing Rule Definitions in the IOA Edit Environment.

Commenting Out Rule Statements

Existing DO statements in a Control-O rule definition can be commented out through the /> command. This command can be useful for testing how a rule functions without certain statements, or for temporarily disabling certain functions normally performed by the rule.

To comment out a statement, type /> over the first two characters in the DO field, and press Enter. The characters /> are displayed before all lines that have been commented out.

The following statement is used in the examples below:

Copy
DO COMMAND  = D T
  WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM
  WAITMODE   N

Type the /> command.

Copy
DO />MMAND  = D T
  WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM
  WAITMODE   N

Press Enter.

Copy
/> COMMAND  = D T
/> WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM
/> WAITMODE   N

Note that all lines of the specified DO COMMAND statement are commented out.

Removing the Comment Indicators

To remove the comment indicator from a statement that has been commented out, type /> over the first two characters in the statement name and press Enter.

Copy
/> />MMAND  = D T
/> WAIT        CONSOLEID    CONSOLE          SYSTEM
/> WAITMODE   N

Editing Rule Definitions in the Edit Environment

Rule Definition parameters can be edited, that is, moved, copied, deleted, or repeated, by performing IOA Line Editing commands, similar to standard ISPF line commands, from within the Control-O Edit environment.

The Edit Environment in a Rule Definition screen is accessed by typing EDIT in the COMMAND field and pressing Enter.

A 2-character Line Editing command field, marked by underscores, is displayed for each line in the Rule Definition screen.

Editing commands are typed directly onto these underscores.

Figure 26 Entering Editing Commands

Copy
RL: $HASP250   LIB CTOP.PRODSMP.RULES                           TABLE: $HASP
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
__ ON MESSAGE  = $HASP250
__    JNAME          JTYPE         SMFID        SYSTEM                     
__    ROUTE          DESC          CONSOLEID    CONSOLE                    
__    APPEARED     TIMES IN      MINUTES                          And/Or/Not
__ OWNER IOAADMIN GROUP                         MODE PROD    RUNTSEC       
__ THRESHOLD
C_ DESCRIPTION **************************************
A_ DESCRIPTION * JES2 - SUPPRESS JOB PURGED MESSAGE *
__ DESCRIPTION
__ ===========================================================================
__ DO DISPLAY  = SUPPRESS   ROUTE     DESC    CONSOLEID    CONSOLE     
__    SYSTEM                                                           
__ DO
__ ===========================================================================
FILL IN RULE DEFINITION. CMDS: EDIT, SCHED, OPT, SHPF                  17.20.04

The line editing commands that you have typed are processed when Enter is pressed.

For more information and examples of editing rule definitions in the Edit environment, see Editing Rule Definitions in the IOA Edit Environment.

Exiting the Rule Definition Screen

The commands shown in Table 40 can be used to exit the Rule Definition screen.

Table 40 Commands for Exiting the Rule Definition Screen

Command

Description

NEXTRULE (PF11/23)

Keep the changes made to the rule parameters and enter the rule definition of the next rule in the Rule list.

PREVRULE (PF10/22)

Keep the changes made to the rule parameters and enter the rule definition of the previous rule in the Rule list.

END (PF03/15)

Keep the changes made to the rule parameters and return to the Rule List screen.

The changes to the parameters are kept in memory only. They are written to the disk only after you exit the Rule List screen.

CANCEL

Do not keep the changes made to the rule parameters, and return to the Rule List screen.

Exiting the Rule List Screen

Press END (PF03/PF15) to exit the Rule List screen. If changes have been made, the Exit Option window shown in Figure 27 is opened.

Figure 27 Rule List Screen Exit Option Window

Copy
RULES OF LIBRARY: CTO.PROD.RULES                                TABLE: $DSPOOL
COMMAN +-----------------------------------------------------------+  ===> CRSR
OPT  R |                 PLEASE SELECT EXIT OPTION                 |  ---------
     $ |                                                           |
     $ |     SAVE    CREATE                                        |
     $ |                                                           |
     $ |     LIBRARY CTO.PROD.RULES                                |
 ===== |     TABLE   $DSPOOL                                       |  <<<< ====
       |                                                           |
       +-----------------------------------------------------------+
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT                               17.05.45

You must type Y (Yes) or N (No) in one of the two exit options, SAVE or CREATE. It is possible to change the name of the library or the name of the table in the window. You will return either to the Table list or to the entry panel, depending on how you entered the Rule List screen.

Changes made to rules in the table can be saved only by saving an entire table using the Exit Option window.

If you have entered an Exit Option window, but do not want to exit the Rule List screen, press PF04/PF16 (RESET). The Rule List screen is then displayed, and the table is not saved.

Ordering Rule Tables

The Rule Definition screen is used to define and modify rules. Rule definitions are used by Control-O to intercept and manage console messages (or commands, strings, or events). A rule definition that resides in the library is not "active" until it has been ordered. Rule tables can be ordered automatically each day or manually. For more information on automatic ordering of rule tables, see the Control-O chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

When ordering or forcing a rule table, if the table is already active under the Control-O monitor, it is replaced by the new copy of the table. All previous rules of the table are deactivated and replaced by the rules scheduled by the Order or Force.

Two ways to manually order rule tables are by using the O and F options of the Table List screen. These are described in Table 41.

Table 41 Options for Manually Ordering Rule Tables

Option

Description

O (ORDER)

Check the rules’ Basic Scheduling parameters against the requested activation date. If a rule should be scheduled for that day, the rule is loaded into memory under the Control-O monitor.

F (FORCE)

Activate the rules regardless of what is specified in each rule’s Basic Scheduling parameters.

When you use the O and F options, the default confirmation window shown in Figure 28 is opened. If the default has been modified in a profile variable, a different confirmation window, requiring double confirmation, is opened.

Figure 28 Order and Force Confirmation Window

Copy
TABLES OF LIBRARY CTO.PROD.RULES                               ------------(OR)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  NAME ------------ VV.MM  CREATED     CHANGED     SIZE  INIT   MOD   ID
    $HASP             01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    38    38     0 IOAPROD
    COMMANDS          01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    24    24     0 IOAPROD
    CTD                    +-------------------------------+  6     0 M19A 
    CTM                    |   CONFIRM     ODATE 060600    |               
O   CTO        <-----------|   ASK FOR EACH ONE  Y         |               
    DEVICES                +-------------------------------+  4     0 IOAPROD
    EVENTS            01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    20    20     0 IOAPROD
    IEA               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    32    32     0 IOAPROD
O   IEC               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     6     6     0 IOAPROD
    IEE               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    17    17     0 IOAPROD
O   IEF               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    46    46     0 IOAPROD
    IFB               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    32    32     0 IOAPROD
    IKT               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    13    13     0 IOAPROD
    IMS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    26    26     0 IOAPROD
    IOS               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    10    10     0 IOAPROD
    IST               01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     8     8     0 IOAPROD
    SHORTCMD          01.01 00/07/06 00/11/02 12:24    21    20     0 M19A
    SHUTSYS           01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51    19    19     0 IOAPROD
    STARTSYS          01.00 00/07/06 00/07/06 00:51     7     7     0 IOAPROD
    STATS             01.00 00/07/11 00/07/11 17:35    40    40     0 CTOPROD
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   O ORDER   F FORCE   B BROWSE   D DELETE           12.24.50

The specified date can be changed. To confirm your selection, enter Y (Yes) in the CONFIRM field. If you decide not to order or force the table, enter N (No). The original screen is displayed.

The ASK FOR EACH ONE line is displayed if more than one Order or Force is requested. If you are certain that you want to order or force all indicated tables, and do not want to change the ODATE for any of the individual tables, you can type Y (Yes) in the CONFIRM field to bypass individual confirmations and N (No) in the ASK FOR EACH ONE field, and then press Enter. All tables marked O (or F) are ordered.

Wish WO0943

As a result of the Order or Force request an MVS MODIFY command is sent to the Control-O monitor. Some installations may protect the MVS command. If the user is not authorized to issue an MVS MODIFY command the Order or Force fails.  

If you apply this wish, by specifying WO0943 APPLY=YES in the IOADFLTL member, the MODIFY command will be executed under the Control-O or CMEM monitor. Therefore, authority to issue an MVS MODIFY command is required only for the Control-O or CMEM monitor USERID.

Wish WO0943 also introduces

  • the following AutoEdit system variables, each of which return Wish WO0943 with a status of Y or N

    • %%$WO0943

    • %%$MODIFY_O_F

  • the following Control-O MODIFY command

    Copy
    F controlo,WISH=WO0943,xxxxx
    • In this command, xxxxx is either ENABLE or DISABLE

    • This command allows the user to enable or disable optional Wish WO0943 without stopping Control-O.

This is a temporary change to the Wish only. In order to make the change permanent, Wish WO0943 must set to the required value, YES or NO, in the IOADFLTL member.

Copying Rules to Another Table

To copy one or more rules from the current table to another table, type C (Copy) by the rule names in the Rule List screen and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 29is displayed.

Figure 29 Window for Copying Rules to Another Table

Copy
RULES OF LIBRARY: CTO.PROD.RULES                                TABLE: EXIT
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  RULE       TYP------------- DESCRIPTION -------------------------------
     EXIT        E EXIT    EXIT 000 
     EXITMSG1    E EXIT    EXIT 001
     EXITMSG2    E EXIT    EXIT 002
     EXITMSG3    E EXIT    EXIT 003
     EXITMSG4 +-----------------------------------------------------------+
     EXITMSG5 |                                                           |
 C   EXITMSG6 |     SPECIFY DESTINATION LIBRARY,TABLE AND RULE NAME       |
     EXITMSG7 |                                                           |
     EXITMSG8 |  LIBRARY :  CTO.PROD.RULES                                |
     EXITMSG9 |  TABLE   :                                                |
     EXITMSG0 |  RULE    :  EXITMSG0                                      |
     EXITMSGA |                                                           |
     EXITMSGB |  PRESS END/RESET TO CANCEL     ENTER TO PERFORM THE COPY  |
     EXITMSGC +-----------------------------------------------------------+
     EXITMSGD    E EXIT    EXIT 00D
     EXITMSGE    E EXIT    EXIT 00E
     EXITMSGF    E EXIT    EXIT 00F
     EXITMSGG    E EXIT    EXIT 00G
     EXITMSGH    E EXIT    EXIT 00H
     EXITMSGI    E EXIT    EXIT 00I
OPTIONS S SELECT D DELETE I INSERT C COPY                               15.37.39

The fields in the window in Figure 29 are described in Table 42. Some fields contain default values which can be modified.

Table 42 Fields in the Window for Copying Rules to Another Table

Field

Description

LIBRARY

Library containing the table into which the rule should be copied. Must be an existing library. Default: the current library.

TABLE

Name of the table into which the rule should be copied.

If the specified table does not exist, the table is created when the request is performed.

RULE

Name of the rule to be copied. If multiple rules are selected, the window is first displayed with the first selected rule. As each request is performed or canceled, the next requested rule name appears.

  • To perform a request, press Enter.

  • To cancel a request, press PF03/PF15 (END) or PF04/PF16 (RESET).

Message Statistics Screen

The Message Statistics screen displays statistics for all messages and commands intercepted by Control-O. Selection criteria for statistics can be specified in the Show Option window, which is described in Show Option Window.

To enter the Message Statistics screen, select Option OM (Control-O Message Statistics) in the IOA Primary Option menu.

Figure 30 Message Statistics Screen

Copy
------------- CONTROL-O MESSAGE STATISTICS FROM 12/12/00 11:12:51 ---------(OM)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
MSG  659,035  CMD    1,714  HANDLED  607,498  SUPPRESSED  606,885    SMFID FDSF
O ID        TYP    COUNT   HANDLED SUPPRESSED ------------ TEXT ---------------
  $HASP000 M   26,347 26,347 26,347  $HASP000 OK
     $HASP317   M    19,556    19,556    19,556  $HASP317 T17INS24 0005 DATA SETS
     $HASP250   M    17,091    17,091    16,993  $HASP317 T17INS24 IS PURGED
     ICH7001I   M    17,004    17,004    17,004  ICH7001I T72A     LAST ACCESS AT
     $HASP100   M    16,568    16,568    16,568  $HASP100 PRDKPL02 ON INTRDR
     $HASP373   M    12,995    12,995    10,307  $HAPS373 PRDKPL01 STARTED - INIT
     $HASP395   M    12,992    12,992    10,306  $HASP395 T44UPDTA ENDED
     IEF403I    M    12,991    12,991    12,991  IEF403I T44UPDTA - ENDED - TIME=
     IEF404I    M    12,990    12,990    12,990  IEF404I PRKDPL-1 - STARTED - TIM
     $HASP309   M    12,802    12,802    12,802  $HASP309    INIT 4 INACTIVE ****
     IEF125I    M     3,430     3,430     3,430  IEF125I T21 - LOGGED ON - TIME=1
     IEF667I    M     3,421     3,421     3,421  IEF667I WARNING MESSAGE(S) FOR J
     IEF126I    M     3,284     3,284     3,284  IEF126I T74 - LOGGED OFF - TIME=
     IEF234E    M     2,725     2,725         0  IEF234E K 481,994631,PVT,T15MALL
     IEF233A    M     2,499     2,499         0  IEF233A M 480,015537,,PRGPL27A,C
     $HASP688   M     1,683     1,683       906  $HASP688 T92PRNTS OUTGRP=1.1.1
     $HASP608   M     1,527         0         0  $HASP608 T02KPL91 EXECUTING A PR
     IEC705I    M     1,525     1,525         0  IEC705I TAPE ON 480,014901,SL,62
     IEE600I    M     1,504     1,504     1,009  IEE600I REPLY TO 72 IS; NOHOLD
OPTIONS:  S SHOW  X EXCLUDE  R RESET                                   14.29.51

Up and down scrolling conventions and right and left shifting conventions are supported in the Message Statistics screen.

To update the display with the last available values from the Control-O monitor, type REFRESH in the COMMAND field and press Enter, or press PF16.

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Fields of the Message Statistics Screen

Table 43 Fields of the Message Statistics Screen

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

Date and Time fields

Date and time from which the current statistics accumulation began. This is the top line of the screen.

SMFID

SMF ID of the computer for which the statistics are accumulated (under the SCROLL===> field).

The following information is shown for each displayed message or command:

OPTION

Allows entry of line options next to a message or command.

ID

  • For messages, the message code

  • For commands, the command text, such as S for S OPER1

Message or command IDs may have been redefined through a DO SET %%$STATID statement in the rule definition.

TYP

Indicates whether the current line describes a message or a command. Valid values are:

  • M — message

  • C — command

When an operator command is issued, MVS internally issues a message with the command text. This message is intercepted by Control-O and written to the Statistics file. Therefore, operator commands appear twice in the Statistics screen, the first time with type C, and the second time with type M.

COUNT

Number of times the message or command has been intercepted by Control-O (from the start of accumulation). The format of this field is discussed in "COUNT Field, HANDLED Field and SUPPRESSED Field Formats" immediately below this table.

HANDLED

Number of message or command occurrences for which at least one rule has been triggered by Control-O. The format of this field is discussed in "COUNT Field, HANDLED Field and SUPPRESSED Field Formats" immediately below this table.

SUPPRESSED

Number of message or command occurrences which have been suppressed by Control-O. The format of this field is discussed in "COUNT Field, HANDLED Field and SUPPRESSED Field Formats" immediately below this table.

TEXT

Text of the first occurrence of the message or command after the creation of the Statistics file.

When the text length exceeds the text field length, the RIGHT command (PF11/PF23) can be used to shift more text into view, or the WRAP command can be used to "wrap" (continue) the text display in the following lines.

For messages or commands which have been locally reset (by the RESET option, the REDATE command can be used to alternate between display of the message text and display of the reset date and time. The RESET command is discussed in CANCEL and RESET Commandss.

The following summary information is shown for all displayed messages and commands:

MSG

Total number of message occurrences (sum of the COUNT fields for all displayed messages).

CMD

Total number of command occurrences (sum of the COUNT fields for all displayed commands).

HANDLED

Total number of messages/commands handled by Control-O (sum of all HANDLED fields).

SUPPRESSED

Total number of messages/commands suppressed by Control-O (sum of all SUPPRESSED fields).

COUNT Field, HANDLED Field and SUPPRESSED Field Formats

The format for the COUNT, HANDLED, and SUPPRESSED fields, in both detail and summary lines, is as follows:

  • Values up to 999,999 appear in standard numeric format nnn,nnn.

  • Larger values are indicated by a K or M, as shown in Table44.

Table 44 Format of the COUNT, HANDLED and SUPPRESSED Fields

Value

Description

nnn,nnnK

Values are rounded to the nearest thousand. nnn,nnn represents the number of thousands.

nnn,nnnM

Values larger than nnn,nnnK are rounded to the nearest million. nnn,nnn represents the number of millions.

An asterisk following a COUNT value (for example, 2,984*) indicates that the statistics for that particular message or command have been locally reset using the RESET option (discussed in Options of the Message Statistics Screen). Asterisks following COUNT values disappear after global resets. (Global reset of the entire Message Statistics facility is performed by the operator, and is discussed in the Control-O chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

Commands of the Message Statistics Screen

The following commands can be specified in the COMMAND field of the Message Statistics screen:

Table 45 Commands of the Message Statistics Screen

Command

Description

REDATE

The REDATE command (PF14) alternates between display of message text and display of the reset date and time, in the TEXT field of messages which have been locally reset.

WRAP

The WRAP command modifies the display so that TEXT field information is alternately wrapped or not wrapped around to the next lines. Text that is not wrapped around to the next line can be viewed by using the RIGHT command (PF11/PF23) if necessary.

REFRESH

The REFRESH command (PF16) refreshes the display with the most currently available statistics.

Changes requested of the Control-O monitor (such as EXCLUDE and RESET, which are described later in this chapter) are not reflected after a REFRESH until the Control-O monitor has processed the request.

For more information on EXCLUDE, see "X (EXCLUDE)" in Options of the Message Statistics Screen. For more information on RESET, see "R (RESET)" in Options of the Message Statistics Screen.

SORT

The SORT command (PF04/PF16) alternately switches the sort order of the displayed messages or commands using the following formats:

  • SORT ON COUNT — Sort according to the value in the COUNT field. The highest value is displayed first. Default.

  • SORT ON ID — Sort alphabetically according to the value in the ID field.

SHOW

The SHOW command (PF02/PF14) opens the Show Option window, which is used to specify Show criteria, that is, to determine which records are shown in the Message Statistics screen.

Show Option Window

The Show Option window is shown in Figure 31. It enables you to specify criteria to determine which messages and commands are included in the statistics display. To open the window, type SHOW in the COMMAND field of the Message Statistics screen, or press PF02/PF14. Make the desired changes in the Show Option window, and press Enter.

Figure 31 Message and Statistics Screen Show Option Window

Copy
------------- CONTROL-O MESSAGE STATISTICS FROM 12/12/00 11:12:51 ---------(OM)
COMMAND ===>                     +--------------------------------------------+
MSG  659,035  CMD    1,714  HAN  |       PLEASE SELECT SHOW OPTION            |
O ID        TYP    COUNT   HAND  |                                            |
  $HASP000   M    26,347    26,  |  MSGID                                     |
  $HASP317   M    19,556    19,  |  TEXT                                      |
  $HASP250   M    17,091    17,  |                                            |
  ICH7001I   M    17,004    17,  |  COUNT FROM           TO                   |
  $HASP100   M    16,568    16,  |                                            |
  $HASP373   M    12,995    12,  |  COMMANDS        Y | MESSAGES           Y  |
  $HASP395   M    12,992    12,  |  SHOWN           N | EXCLUDED           Y  |
  IEF403I    M    12,991    12,  |    ------------------------------------    |
  IEF404I    M    12,990    12,  |  HANDLED         N | NOT HANDLED        N  |
  $HASP309   M    12,802    12,  |  SUPPRESSED      N | NOT SUPPRESSED     N  |
  IEF125I    M     3,430     3,  |                                            |
  IEF667I    M     3,421     3,  +--------------------------------------------+
  IEF126I    M     3,284     3,
  IEF234E    M     2,725     2,725         0  IEF234E K 481,994631,PVT,T15MALL
  IEF233A    M     2,499     2,499         0  IEF233A M 480,015537,,PRGPL27A,C
  $HASP688   M     1,683     1,683       906  $HASP688 T92PRNTS OUTGRP=1.1.1
  $HASP608   M     1,527         0         0  $HASP608 T02KPL91 EXECUTING A PR
  IEC705I    M     1,525     1,525         0  IEC705I TAPE ON 480,014901,SL,62
  IEE600I    M     1,504     1,504     1,009  IEE600I REPLY TO 72 IS; NOHOLD
OPTIONS:  S SHOW  X EXCLUDE  R RESET                                   14.29.51

The selection criteria that are available are shown in Table 46.

Selection criteria marked with the symbol P act on a prefix basis.

Table 46 Show Option Selection Criteria

Criteria

Description

MSGIDP

Includes only messages and commands with the indicated IDs. Masking characters * and ? are supported. Up to three values can be specified.

TEXTP

Includes only messages and commands which match a specified string. The * (asterisk) and ? (question mark) masking characters are supported.

If both MSGID and TEXT values are specified, only messages that meet criteria for both are included.

COUNT FROM/TO

Includes only messages and commands whose COUNT values are within a specified range. FROM and TO values specify lower and upper limits, respectively. An unspecified value indicates no limit.

MESSAGES

Whether to display messages. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages are displayed.

COMMANDS

Whether to display commands. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Commands are displayed.

  • N (No) — Commands are not displayed.

EXCLUDED

Whether to display messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has been specified. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has been specified are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has been specified are not displayed.

SHOWN

Whether to display messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has not been specified. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Non-excluded messages and commands (that is, messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has not been specified) are displayed.

  • N (No) — Non-excluded messages and commands (that is, messages and commands for which the X (Exclude) option has not been specified) are not displayed.

HANDLED

Whether to display messages and commands with a non-zero HANDLED field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages and commands with a non-zero HANDLED field are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages and commands whose HANDLED field is non-zero are not displayed.

NOT HANDLED

Whether to display messages and commands with a zero HANDLED field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages and commands with a zero HANDLED field are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages and commands with a zero HANDLED field are not displayed.

SUPPRESSED

Whether to display messages and commands with a non-zero SUPPRESSED field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages and commands with a non-zero SUPPRESSED field are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages and commands with a non-zero SUPPRESSED field are not displayed.

NOT SUPPRESSED

Whether to display messages and commands with a zero SUPPRESSED field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Messages and commands with a zero SUPPRESSED field are displayed.

  • N (No) — Messages and commands with a zero SUPPRESSED field are not displayed.

Options of the Message Statistics Screen

The following options, listed at the bottom of the screen, can be applied to any statistics line.

Options applied by a user to a specific message or command, such as Reset, Exclude or Show, affect the statistics for that message or command for all users — not only for the user’s own display.

Table 47 Options of the Message Statistics Screen

Option

Description

R (RESET)

Requests local reset — the reset of the counts for a specific message/command back to zero. This option displays the text *** R E S E T *** in place of the statistics. The statistics are reset the next time the Control-O monitor checks statistics.

Performing a RESET does not refresh the display; specify REFRESH in the COMMAND field to display the most current statistics after a RESET.

X (EXCLUDE)

Excludes individual messages and commands from the displayed statistics.

S (SHOW)

Restores previously excluded messages and commands into the displayed statistics.

Rule Status Screen

The Rule Status screen displays the statuses of rules loaded into memory by Control-O. Selection criteria for rules can be specified in the Show Option window, which is discussed in Show Option Window. The Rule Status screen is also used to hold, delete, free, cancel or change the operation mode of rules.

To enter the Rule Status screen, select the OS option in the IOA Primary Option menu.

Up and down scrolling conventions are supported on the Rule Status screen.

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Two predefined display types (described below) are available for the Rule Status screen.

Changing Display Types

While in the Rule Status screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

DI A displays the All Fields display type.

Valid predefined display types are:

  • D – Default display type

  • A – All Fields display type

Your INCONTROL administrator can also define additional site-specific display types.

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 32 shows an example of the Default display type of the Rule Status screen.

Figure 32 Rule Status Screen Display Type D (Default)

Copy
---------------------------- CONTROL-O RULE STATUS ----------<D>-----------(OS)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
RULES:   584   MSG   481   CMD    64   EVN    39   ACTIVATED   569   SMFID FDSF
O RULE       TYP ---- DESCRIPTION ---- ACTIVATED --------- STATUS -------- UP
  IRA200E     M  AUX. STORAGE SHORTAG         7  EXECUTING - KSL
  IEF126I     M  SUPPRESS TSO LOGOFF      4,639  ACTIVE
  IFB060E     M  LOGREC 90% FULL             29  ACTIVE
  IEE366I     M  NO SMF DATA SET AVAI       34   ACTIVE
  IEF450I     M  LOG ALL ABEND MSG        1,270  ACTIVE
  IEF238D     M  JOB WAITING FOR UNIT        35  ACTIVE
  IEF433D     M  REPLY HOLD OR NOHOLD        35  ACTIVE
  IEF863I     M  DS NOT BALANCED MSG         96  EXECUTING - TSO
  ICH7001I    M  SUPPRESS RACF MSG       12,615  ACTIVE
  $HASP375    M  TEST - EXCEEDED LINE         2  HELD
  NOT BAL     S  APPL NOT BALANCED MS         4  WAIT ACTIVATION
  SHUTSYS     C  FAST SHUT-SYSTEM CMD        78  ACTIVE
  $PJ*        C  CONTROL JES PURGE CM        17  ACTIVE
  CICS-UP     E  CICS PRODUCTION IS U       407  WAIT ACTIVATION
  NIGHT-S     E  NIGHT SHIFT EVENT          183  WAIT ACTIVATION
  DAY-S       E  DAY SHIFT EVENT            184  WAIT ACTIVATION
  R1?T*       R  CONTROL RJE JOBS         9,202  ACTIVE
  P*          D  HANDLE NOT-CATLGD 2         21  ACTIVE
  PRD*        D  TRIGGER ON DS CATALO        58  WAIT ACTIVATION
OPTIONS:  ? WHY  H HOLD  D DEL   F FREE  M MODE  C CANCEL  R RESUME  17.04.29

Table 48 describes the fields of the Default display type of the Rule Status screen.

Table 48 Fields of Display Type D (Default)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<D>

Indicates Default display type.

Monitor status indicator

Indicates whether the Control-O monitor is up or down.

SMFID

SMF ID of the computer for which the statuses are shown.

The following information is shown for each rule in the Default display type:

OPTION

Allows entry of line options to be applied to a particular rule activation.

RULE

Rule name — the name that appears in the first ON statement in the rule definition

TYPE

Rule type.

Valid values are:

  • 4 — OMEGAEXP (OMEGAMON exception interface)

  • 5 — SYSOUT (interception of message text)

  • B — SMS (data set name allocation)

  • C — Command

  • D — DSNEVENT (setting of data set disposition at deallocation time)

  • E — Event

  • M — Message

  • P — Control-M/Links for Windows NT message

  • R — JOBARRIVAL (arrival of job on the JES spool)

  • S — String

  • V — MAINVIEW Alarm

  • X — JOBEND (completion of the job)

  • Z — Step (termination of a specified step in a specific job)

DESCRIPTION

First twenty characters from the first line of the DESCRIPTION field in the rule definition.

ACTIVATED

Counter indicating the number of times a rule was activated (triggered).

The format of this field is discussed in detail in "Display Type A (All Fields)," which follows this table.

STATUS

Rule status. Valid values are:

  • EXECUTING — WAITRESP – the rule is executing and waiting for a response to a command issued in command-response mode

  • EXECUTING — KSL – that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a KSL script

  • EXECUTING — TSO – means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX procedure

  • EXECUTING — SHELL – means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a z/OS shell script

  • EXECUTING — WAIT – means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of an event

  • EXECUTING — ASKOPER – means that the rule is executing and waiting for an operator reply

  • ACTIVE means that all prerequisite and time conditions have been met; the rule can be triggered

  • WAIT — ACTIVATION means that the rule is not activated; it is waiting for prerequisite and/or time conditions to be met

  • HELD means that the rule has been placed in HELD status by line option. It cannot be triggered until freed.

  • SUSPEND means that the rule is suspended because it reached its THRESHOLD. The rule cannot be triggered until the RESUME line command is executed.

The following summary information is shown for all displayed rules (that is, active rules as filtered by the Show criteria):

RULES

Total number of rules included in the display.

MSG

Combined total of message, string, and CMEM rules included in the display.

CMD

Total number of command rules included in the display.

EVN

Total number of event rules included in the display.

ACTIVATED

Total number of displayed rules that have been activated (triggered) at least once in the display.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Figure 33 is an example of the All Fields display type for the Rule Status screen. In this display type, all possible status fields are displayed for each rule. This display type is requested by typing DISPLAY A (abbreviated DI A) in the COMMAND field of the screen.

Figure 33 Rule Status Screen Display Type A (All Fields)

Copy
---------------------------- CONTROL-O RULE STATUS ------------<A>---------(OS)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
RULES:    450  MSG    378  CMD     17  EVN      3  ACTIVATED     22  SMFID OS35
O RULE       TYP --- DESCRIPTION ----  ACTIVATED ---------- STATUS ------  UP 
  $HASP493    M  JES2 - MARK THAT JES         0  ACTIVE                       
   LIBRARY:  CTOP.PROD.RULES                               TABLE:    STARTCTO 
   LAST ORDERED:   08/08/00 16:48:26   MODE:    PROD  PROD  PRIORITY:         
   LAST TRIGGERED: **/**/** **:**:**   RUNTSEC: :                             
   GROUP:                              OWNER:   M22        CONTINUE SEARCH: Y 
   CREATED BY: UNKNOWN  AT  **/**/** **:**:** VERSION:  **.**                 
   UPDATED BY: UNKNOWN  AT  **/**/** **:**:** RELEASE:  PRE V6.0.             
   THRESHOLD           CTO VALUE 000001000 CURRENT 000000000 MAX 000000000    
                                                                              
  $*          C  STATS FOR JES2 CMDS        247  ACTIVE                       
   LIBRARY:  CTOP.PROD.RULES                               TABLE:    STATS    
   LAST ORDERED:   08/08/00 16:48:26   MODE:    PROD  PROD  PRIORITY:         
   LAST TRIGGERED: 09/08/00 11:00:09   RUNTSEC: :                             
   GROUP:                              OWNER:   M24A       CONTINUE SEARCH: Y 
   CREATED BY: UNKNOWN  AT  **/**/** **:**:** VERSION:  **.**                 
   UPDATED BY: UNKNOWN  AT  **/**/** **:**:** RELEASE:  PRE V6.0.             
   THRESHOLD           CTO VALUE 000001000 CURRENT 000000000 MAX 000000004    
                                                                              
  $*          M  STATS FOR JES2 CMDS/     8,434  ACTIVE                       
OPTIONS:  ? WHY  H HOLD  D DEL   F FREE  M MODE  C CANCEL  R RESUME  17.04.29

Table 49 shows the fields of the All Fields display type for the Rule Status screen.

Table 49 Fields of Display Type A (All Fields)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<A>

Indicates the All Fields display type.

Monitor status indicator

Indicates whether the Control-O monitor is up or down.

SMFID

SMF ID of the computer for which the statuses are shown.

The following information is shown for each rule displayed in the All Fields display type:

OPTION

Allows entry of line options to be applied to a particular rule activation.

RULE

Rule name — the name that appears in the first ON statement in the rule definition.

TYPE

Rule type. Valid values are:

  • M — Message

  • C — Command

  • E — Event

  • 4 — OMEGAEXP (OMEGAMON exception interface)

  • S — String

  • P — Control-M/Links for Windows NT message

  • R — JOBARRIVAL (arrival of job on the JES spool)

  • X — JOBEND (completion of the job)

  • D — DSNEVENT (setting of data set disposition at deallocation time)

  • Z — Step (termination of a specified step in a specific job)

  • B — SMS (data set name allocation)

  • 5 — SYSOUT (interception of message text)

DESCRIPTION

First 20 characters from the first line of the DESCRIPTION field in the rule definition.

ACTIVATED

Total number of displayed rules that have been triggered at least once. For more information, see "ACTIVATED" later in this table.

STATUS

Rule status. Valid values are:

  • EXECUTING — WAITRESP means that the rule is executing and waiting for a response to a command issued in command-response mode.

  • EXECUTING — KSL means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a KSL script.

  • EXECUTING — TSO means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX procedure.

  • EXECUTING — SHELL – means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of a z/OS shell script

  • EXECUTING — WAIT means that the rule is executing and waiting for completion of an event.

  • EXECUTING — ASKOPER means that the rule is executing and waiting for an operator reply.

  • ACTIVE means that all prerequisite and time conditions have been met; the rule can be triggered.

  • WAIT — ACTIVATION means that the rule is not activated. It is waiting for prerequisite or time conditions to be met.

  • HELD means that the rule has been placed in HELD status by a line option. It cannot be triggered until freed.

  • SUSPEND means that the rule is suspended because it reached its THRESHOLD. The rule cannot be triggered until line command RESUME is executed.

LIBRARY

Name of library containing the rule member.

MEMBER

Name of member containing the rule.

LAST ORDERED

Date and time when the rule was last ordered.

MODE

Rule operation mode (PROD, LOG, TEST). MODE displays two fields. The first field is the current MODE. The second field is the MODE that is defined in the rule.

PRIORITY

Internal Control-O rule scanning priority.

LAST TRIGGERED

Date and time when the rule was last triggered.

RUNTSEC

Type of runtime security checks to be performed on the rule.

GROUP

Group name of the rule.

OWNER

Owner of the rule as defined in the rule definition.

CONTINUE SEARCH

Whether to continue the search for additional rules meeting the selection criteria. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Continue the search for additional rules meeting the selection criteria.

  • N (No) — Do not continue the search for additional rules meeting the selection criteria.

CREATED BY

Identity of the user that created the rule.

AT

Date and time the rule was created.

VERSION

Version of the Rule Definition screen with which the rule was created.

UPDATED BY

Identity of the user who last updated the rule.

AT

Date and time the rule was last updated.

RELEASE

Control-O release under which the rule was created.

THRESHOLD

Maximum number of times the rule can be triggered before subsequent triggerings are suspended. This value is defined with the rule.

CTO VALUE

The default rule threshold of Control-O.

CURRENT

Number of times the rule has been triggered in the current interval.

MAX

Number of times the rule threshold has been reached.

The following summary information is shown for all displayed rule statuses (that is, active rules as filtered by the Show criteria):

RULES

Total number of rules displayed.

MSG

Total of message, string, ON RULE, ON JOBARRIVAL, ON JOBEND, ON DSNEVENT, and ON STEP rules displayed.

CMD

Total number of command rules and CTOPCMSG rules displayed.

EVN

Total number of event rules displayed.

ACTIVATED

Total number of displayed rules that have been triggered at least once.

The format for the ACTIVATED field in detail lines is as follows:

  • Values up to 999,999 appear in standard numeric format nnn,nnn.

  • Larger values are indicated by a K or M, as follows:

  • nnn,nnnK — Values are rounded to the nearest thousand. nnn,nnn represents the number of thousands.

  • nnn,nnnM — Values larger than nnn,nnnK are rounded to the nearest million. nnn,nnn represents the number of millions.

Commands of the Rule Status Screen

The following commands can be specified in the COMMAND field of the Rule Status screen.

Table 50 Commands of the Rule Status Screen

Command

Description

SORT

The SORT command (PF04/PF16) alternately changes the sort order of the displayed messages/commands between the following:

  • SORT ON PRIORITY — Sort status display in order of rule priority — highest value first. Default.

  • SORT ON SCHEDULING ORDER — Sort status display according to rule scheduling order — earliest first.

SHOW

The SHOW command (PF02/PF14) opens the Show Option window which is used to specify criteria that determine which rules will appear in the Rule Status screen.

DISPLAY

The DISPLAY command changes the display type.

The command syntax is DISPLAY x (abbreviated DI x). In this command, x is the identifying letter of the desired type.

Show Option Window

Figure 34 is an example of the Show Option window, which enables you to specify criteria to determine which active rules are included in the status display. To open the window, type SHOW in the COMMAND field of the Rule Status screen, or press PF02/PF14. Change criteria by making the desired changes and pressing Enter.

Figure 34 Rule Status Screen Show Option Window

Copy
---------------------------- CONTROL-O RULE STATUS ------------<D>---------(OS)
COMMAND ===>      +-----------------------------------------------------------+
RULES:    450  MSG|                PLEASE SELECT SHOW OPTION                  |
O RULE       TYP -|  RULE                                                     |
  CMEMJOBA    R  S|  GROUP                                                    |
  JOBEND      X  S|                                                           |
  CMEMJOB     D  S|  LIBRARY                                                  |
  $HASP493    M  J|  TABLE                                                    |
  CT0139I     M  C|         ====  STATUS   ====                               |
  CT0621I     M  C|  ACTIVE Y EXECUTING Y WAIT ACTIVE Y HELD Y SUSPEND  Y     |
  CTO623I     M  C|         ==== RULE TYPE ====                               |
  COSCLEAR    E  I|   MSG STR COM EVN DSN INT JOB RUL STP OMG PCM MVI SMS SYS |
  COSINI      C  C|    Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y  |
  COSCMD*     C  E|  PRIORITY  FROM    TO      CONTINUE SEARCH  YES Y NO Y    |
  COSTERM     C  T|                                                           |
  COSBOUNZ    C  B|  ACTIVATION#  FROM               TO                       |
  COSUP       C  S|                                                           |
  COSDOWN     C  S|  OWNER               MODE:  PROD Y   TEST Y   LOG Y       |
  COSOBJ *    C  S+-----------------------------------------------------------+
  COSCUP *    C  SYNTAX SUGARING FOR          0  ACTIVE                       
  COSCDOWN *  C  SYNTAX SUGARING FOR          0  ACTIVE                       
  OPTIONS:  ? WHY  H HOLD  D DEL  F FREE  M MODE  C CANCEL  R RESUME     11.17.01

Selection criteria marked with the symbol P act on a prefix basis.

Table 51 shows the criteria that can be specified in the Rule Status screen Show Options window.

Table 51 Rule Status Screen Show Option Window Criteria

Criteria

Description

RULEP

Includes only rules having the indicated name (prefix). A maximum of five values can be specified.

GROUPP

Includes only rules belonging to the specified group (prefix). A maximum of four values can be specified.

LIBRARYP

Includes only rules whose members are found in the specified library (prefix).

TABLEP

Includes only rules found in the specified table (prefix). A maximum of five values can be specified.

STATUS

The STATUS fields in the Show Option window are

  • ACTIVE

  • EXECUTING

  • WAIT

  • ACTIVATION

  • HELD

  • SUSPEND.

Valid values for each of these STATUS fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Includes rules with the indicated status.

  • N (No) — Excludes rules with the indicated status.

RULE TYPE

The type of the rule. Valid RULE TYPEs are:

  • MSG — Message

  • STR — String

  • COM — Command

  • EVN — Event

  • DSN — Data set event

  • INT — JOBARRIVAL

  • JOB — JOBEND

  • RUL — Rule

  • STP — Step

  • OMG — OMEGAEXP

  • PCM — CTOPCMSG

  • MVI — MAINVIEW Alarm

  • SMS — Storage Management System

  • SYS — SYSOUT

Valid values for each of these RULE TYPEs are:

  • Y (Yes) — includes rules of the indicated type

  • N (No) — excludes rules of the indicated type

PRIORITY FROM/TO

Includes rules whose priority is within the specified range. A FROM or TO value can be specified without specifying both values. In this parameter, 0 ¹ blank.

CONTINUE SEARCH YES/NO

For both CONTINUE SEARCH YES and CONTINUE SEARCH NO, you can specify Y or N in the Show Option window. The effect is as follows:

  • CONTINUE SEARCH YES:

  • — Y (Yes) — includes rules with a CONTINUE SEARCH value of YES

  • — N (No) — excludes rules with a CONTINUE SEARCH value of YES

  • CONTINUE SEARCH NO:

  • — Y (Yes) — includes rules with a CONTINUE SEARCH value of NO

  • — N (No) — excludes rules with a CONTINUE SEARCH value of NO

ACTIVATION# FROM/TO

Includes rules with a number of activations (that is, with a value in the ACTIVATED field) that is within the specified range. A FROM or TO value can be specified without specifying both values.

OWNERP

Includes rules belonging to the specified owner.

MODE

MODE fields in the Show Option window are:

  • PROD

  • TEST

  • LOG

You can specify Y or N in each of the MODE fields. The effect is as follows:

  • Y (Yes) — includes rules in the indicated mode

  • N (No) — excludes rules in the indicated mode

Options of the Rule Status Screen

Table 52 shows the options that can be applied to the rule status line of any rule that is not currently active (that is, any rule that has EXECUTING status). These options are listed at the bottom of the Rule Status screen.

Table 52 Options of the Rule Status Screen

Option

Description

? (WHY)

Displays the Why screen, which indicates why the rule is in WAIT ACTIVATION status. This status is discussed in "Why Screen" immediately below this table.

H (HOLD)

Holds the rule (places the rule in HELD status). The rule will not execute unless freed by the FREE option. In some cases the HOLD request may be rejected by the Control-O monitor. A rule that is executing cannot be held.

D (DELETE)

Deletes the rule from the active environment. A rule must be placed in HELD status before it can be deleted.

F (FREE)

Frees a held rule.

M (MODE)

Changes the current MODE of the rule (from TEST to LOG, from LOG to PROD, and from PROD to LOG).

R (RESUME)

Changes the status of a rule from SUSPEND (that is, the rule has reached its threshold) to ACTIVE, so that the rule is eligible for triggering.

The following option is valid only for rules that are currently active, that is, those that have EXECUTING status:

C (CANCEL)

Cancels the execution of the rule. If the rule is executing a DO TSO, DO KSL, or DO SHELL, the TSO command, KSL script, or z/OS shell script is also canceled.

Why Screen

Figure 35 shows the Why screen, which is displayed when ? (WHY) is entered on the Rule Status screen. The Why screen shows reasons for the WAIT ACTIVATION status.

Figure 35 Why Screen

Copy
-------------------------- CICSP    IS WAITING FOR: ---------------------(OS.?)
COMMAND ===>                                                   SCROLL====> CRSR
   
        TIME LIMIT        FROM   0900            UNTIL
        CONDITION        DAILY-PROD              ODATE    0203
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>      END OF "WHY" LIST     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
PRESS END PFK TO RETURN TO STATUS SCREEN                               10.46.20

Scrolling conventions are supported if the displayed list is longer than one screen.

To return to the Rule Status screen, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Automation Log Screen

The Automation Log screen displays the stream of messages and commands captured by Control-O, as well as Control-O internal messages and traces of rules executing with MODE set to LOG.

In a Sysplex environment, this screen can also be used to view the MVS Operlog.

The messages are displayed together with all the additional information which is relevant to the automation process

Selection criteria for display can be specified either in the Show Option window, which is described in Show Option Window, or with special commands such as ALL or TRACE. Either the current Automation Log or a backup Automation Log can be displayed.

To request the Automation Log facility, select OL (Control-O Automation Log) in the IOA Primary Option menu.

Up and down scrolling conventions are supported on the Automation Log screen.

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

The predefined display types (described below) are available for the Automation Log screen. The operator can control the amount of information displayed, and the format of the display, by choosing one of the available display types. Customized display types can also be defined.

Changing Display Types

While in the Automation Log screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is DISPLAY x. In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

DI A

displays the All Fields display type.

Table 53 shows the valid All Fields display types.

Table 53 Valid All Fields Display Types

Type

Description

V

Zebra display type (alternate blue and white color stripes)

A

All Fields display type

B

Debug display type

D

Default display type

O

Operator display type

W

Display for Terminal Type 5

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 36 shows an example of the Default display type (indicated by <D> in the top line of the screen) for the Automation Log screen.

Figure 36 Automation Log Screen Default Display Type (D)

Copy
  -------------< D >------------- AUTOMATION LOG  ---------------------------(OL)
  COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
  SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 020200 - 020200
  DATE   TIME   JOBNAME  ------------------- M E S S A G E ----------------------
  020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144714 CONSOLE   IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.47.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME=
  020200 144721 RESOLVE   AMTRP1I FOLLOWING REPLYS OUTSTANDING FOR   5 MINUTES
  020200 144721 RESOLVE   AMTRP2I NETVIEW  *12 DSI802A CNM01    REPLY WITH VALID
  020200 144751 TSO       LOGON
  020200 144751 TSO       LOGON
  020200 144756           626 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  020200 144756           626   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL
  020200 144759 M06C      627 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  020200 144759 M06C      627   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL L3042
  020200 144759 JES2      $HASP100 M06C     ON TSOINRDR
  020200 144759 M06C      $HASP373 M06C     STARTED
  020200 144800 M06C      IEF125I M06C - LOGGED ON - TIME=14.48.00
  020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
  020200 144814 CONSOLE   IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.48.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME=
  CMDS: SHOW, SHPF, ALL, LIMIT, LOCATE, TRACE, WRAP, SWAP                14.48.54

Table 54 shows the fields of the Default display type, with explanations of each field.

Table 54 Fields of Default Display Type (D)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<D>

Indicates the Default display type.

SHOW LIMIT ON field name

Indicates that a search limit has been set through the SHOW command for a record field such as ID, NAME JOBID, ROUTE, DESC, or CONID. For more information on these fields, see "Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type" in Display Type A (All Fields). For information about the SHOW command, see Show Option Window.

If a search limit has not been set, the field is blank.

DATE (fromdate, todate)

Range of dates, in standard 6-digit format, of the displayed records.

The following information is shown for each line of the Automation Log displayed in the Default display type:

DATE

Record creation date.

TIME

Record creation time.

JOBNAME

Name of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command. For a command entered on the console, the name of the console address space is also displayed.

MESSAGE

Text of the message or command.

Display Type V (Zebra)

The Zebra display type (indicated by <V> in the top line of the screen) is the same as the D display type, except that the displayed lines alternate between blue and white for easier reading. For more information, see Display Type D (Default).

Display Type O (Operator Display)

Figure 37 is an example of the Operator display type (indicated by <O> in the top line of the screen) for the Automation Log screen.

Figure 37 Automation Log Screen Operator Display Type (O)

Copy
  -------------< O >------------- AUTOMATION LOG  ---------------------------(OL)
  COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
  SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 020200 - 020200
  TIME   JOBNAME  T-JOBID ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.47.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME
  144721 RESOLVE  S 09268  AMTRP1I FOLLOWING REPLYS OUTSTANDING FOR   5 MINUTES
  144721 RESOLVE  S 09268  AMTRP2I NETVIEW  *12 DSI802A CNM01    REPLY WITH VALI
  144751 TSO      S 09295  LOGON
  144751 TSO      S 09295  LOGON
  144756          T 00000  626 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  144756          T 00000  626   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL
  144759 M06C     T 00000  627 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  144759 M06C     T 00000  627   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL L3042
  144759 JES2     T 14699  $HASP100 M06C     ON TSOINRDR
  144759 M06C     T 14699  $HASP373 M06C     STARTED
  144800 M06C     T 14699  IEF125I M06C - LOGGED ON - TIME=14.48.00
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.48.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME
  COMMANDS: ALL , LIMIT , LOCATE , SHOW , SHPF , SWAP , TRACE , WRAP     11.23.24

Table 55 Fields of Display Type Operator (O)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<O>

Operator display type.

SHOW LIMIT ON field name

Search limit set through the SHOW command for a record field such as ID, NAME JOBID, ROUTE, DESC, or CONID. For more information on these fields, see "Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type" in Display Type A (All Fields)). For information about the SHOW command, Show Option Window.

DATE (fromdate, todate)

Range of dates, in standard 6-digit format, of the displayed records.

The following information is shown for each line of the Automation Log displayed in the Operator display type:

TIME

Record creation time.

JOBNAME

Name of the job, started task or TSO user that issued the message or command. For a command entered on the console, the name of the console address space is also displayed.

JOBID

Identifier of the job that issued the message or the command.

MESSAGE

Text of the message or command.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Figure 38 is an example of the All Fields display type (indicated by <A> in the top line of the screen) for the Automation Log screen.

Figure 38 Automation Log Screen All Fields Display Type (A)

Copy
  -------------< O >------------- AUTOMATION LOG  ---------------------------(OL)
  COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
  SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 020200 - 020200
  TIME   JOBNAME  T-JOBID ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144714 CONSOLE  S 00000  IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.47.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME
  144721 RESOLVE  S 09268  AMTRP1I FOLLOWING REPLYS OUTSTANDING FOR   5 MINUTES
  144721 RESOLVE  S 09268  AMTRP2I NETVIEW  *12 DSI802A CNM01    REPLY WITH VALI
  144751 TSO      S 09295  LOGON
  144751 TSO      S 09295  LOGON
  144756          T 00000  626 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  144756          T 00000  626   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL
  144759 M06C     T 00000  627 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
  144759 M06C     T 00000  627   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL L3042
  144759 JES2     T 14699  $HASP100 M06C     ON TSOINRDR
  144759 M06C     T 14699  $HASP373 M06C     STARTED
  144800 M06C     T 14699  IEF125I M06C - LOGGED ON - TIME=14.48.00
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  D T
  144814 CONSOLE  S 00000  IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.48.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME
  COMMANDS: ALL , LIMIT , LOCATE , SHOW , SHPF , SWAP , TRACE , WRAP     11.23.24

Table 56 shows the fields of the A Display type, with explanations of each.

Table 56 Fields of Display Type A (All Fields)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<A>

All Fields display type indicator.

SHOW LIMIT ON field_name

Search limit set through the SHOW command for a record field such as ID, NAME JOBID, ROUTE, DESC, or CONID. These fields are described in this table. For information about the SHOW command, see Show Option Window.

DATE (fromdate, todate)

Range of dates, in standard 6-digit format, of the displayed records.

The following information is shown for each line of the Automation Log displayed in the All Fields Display type:

DATE

Record creation date.

TIME

Record creation time.

JOBNAME

Name of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command.

MESSAGE

Text of the message or command.

JOBSTEP

Step of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command.

PROCSTEP

Procedure step of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command.

JOBID

Identifier of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command.

ASID

Address space ID of the job, started task, or TSO user that issued the message or command.

JTYPE

Type of job from which the message or command was issued. Valid values are:

  • S — started task

  • T — TSO

  • J — job

ID

ID (that is, the first word) of the message or command.

When the Dealias feature is active, the ID field of command type records will contain the full format name of the command, even if it was entered in its alias form. The Dealias feature does not affect message type records. For more information on the Dealias feature, see "Dealias Feature" in General Informationand see List of Commands for Which Dealiasing Is Supported.

If the D A MVS command was specified and the Dealias feature is active, the ID field contains the value DISPLAY (not D which was entered as the first word of the command).

TYPE

Record type. Valid values are:

  • M — message

  • C — command

MULTILN

WTO (Write To Operator) flag. Valid values are:

  • R — regular (one line) WTO

  • F — first line of a multi-line WTO

  • M — middle line of a multi-line WTO

  • L — last line of a multi-line WTO

USERID

ID of the address space that created the event.

SYSTEM

Name of the system (that is, the MVS image) from which the message originated.

SMFID

SMF ID of the system in which the message or command was issued.

CONSOLE

Name of the console on which the message was displayed.

CONID

Decimal value of the console ID number.

HANDLED

Indicates whether or not the record was handled by a Control-O rule. Valid values are:

  • Y — The record was handled by a Control-O rule.

  • N — The record was not handled by a Control-O rule.

SUPPRESS

Indicates whether or not the record was suppressed by a Control-O rule. Valid values are:

  • Y — The record was suppressed by a Control-O rule.

  • N — The record was not suppressed by a Control-O rule.

CTO

Indicates whether or not the record was created internally by Control-O. Valid values are:

  • Y — The record was created by Control-O.

  • N — The record was not created by Control-O.

RULSEC

Includes the type of security that was triggered for the event by the final rule, and the USERID value of the owner of either the rule, or of the job, started task, or TSO user (depending on the setup of the security environment).

Valid values include:

  • **** — Unknown type of runtime security (the log is from before version 6.0.00).

  • NONE — No runtime security for the event, or no rule was triggered.

  • OWNER — Runtime security used the OWNER rule.

  • TRIGGER — Runtime security used the USERID rule address space.

For more information on the OWNER parameter, refer to OWNER: General Parameter.

REC_TYPE

Record Type. Valid values are:

  • S — Syslog record.

  • L — Internal trace record from a rule running in LOG mode.

  • W — SHOUT message or a message that also appears in the IOA Log.

J3FLG

JES3 flag (for JES3 sites or Sysplex environment).

Valid values are:

  • F — The message was issued at the current computer.

  • R — The message originated from a local processor and was reissued at the global processor.

SPEC

Special character assigned by MVS as the first non-blank character in the message (‘+’, ‘@’, or ‘*’).

ENVIR

Environment under which the message was received.

Valid values are:

  • 0 — The message was detected by Control-O. All MVS WTOs and commands belong to this category.

  • 1 — CICS message detected by CICS Control-O interface

  • 2 — IMS message detected by IMS Control-O interface

  • 3 — JES3 command detected by Exit IATUX18

  • 4 — JES3 message detected by Exit IATUX31

  • 5 — JES2 command detected by JES2 Exit 5

  • 6 — Data set event or step completion event detected by CMEM

  • 7 — Message detected by Control-D Exit 18

  • 8 — Event detected by Control-O Extended Access Method (XAM) interface

  • 9 — Exception detected by Control-O OMEGAMON exception interface

  • 11 — Event detected by Control-O COSMOS

  • 12 — Event detected by Control-O communication function interface

REPLY

Reply ID for WTOR messages or for replies to WTOR messages
For all other messages and commands, the field is blank.

HCID

Hardcopy ID for messages
Used to identify the various lines of a given WTO multi-line message. The various lines of a multi-line message share the same hardcopy ID. On the display the hardcopy ID precedes the various lines of the message.

DESC

Hexadecimal value of the 2-byte descriptor.

MCSF

Hexadecimal value of the two bytes of MCS flags.

ROUTE

Hexadecimal value of the 16-byte route code.

WQE INFO

Two lines of information taken from the WQE message block. Relevant only to WTO or WTOR messages.

Data formerly displayed in the X.ROUTE field is now included in the ROUTE field. The X.ROUTE field is no longer included in this screen. Prior to Control-O version 5.1.4, the ROUTE field displayed a 2-byte route code.

Display Type B (Debug)

Figure 39 is an example of the Debug display type (indicated by <B> in the top line of the screen) for the Automation Log screen.

Figure 39 Automation Log Screen Debug Display Type (B)

Copy
FuLTER:                      -> AUTOMATION LOG SMF=OS35 <--------< B >-----(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
 SHOW/SEARCH ON =>                                          DATE 110401 - 110401
 DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
 110401 090655 E4WGATE   CTWG91W OPEN ACB FAILED. APPLID=ECSLU01A ACBERFLG=58  
    JOBSTEP  GATEWAY    PROCSTEP E4WGATE  JOBID   14333    ASID    00071 JTYPE S
    ID       CTWG91W    TYPE     M        MULTILN R                            
    SYSTEM   OS35       SMFID    OS35     CONSOLE INTERNAL CONID   000         
    HANDLED  Y          SUPPRESS N        CTO     N        RULESEC NONE IOADMIN
    REC.TYPE S          J3FLG    F        SPEC             ENVIR.  000         
    REPLY    0000       HCID              DESC    0000     MCSF    C000        
    ROUTE    80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00                   
    WRAP IOA 0265       W.EXT 0265        RBA  00221E      EV.COUNT 144328     
                                                                               
 110401 090655 E4WGATE   CTWG74I PROBABLE CAUSE: ACB HAS ALREADY BEEN OPENED   
    JOBSTEP  GATEWAY    PROCSTEP E4WGATE  JOBID   14333    ASID    00071 JTYPE S
    ID       CTWG74I    TYPE     M        MULTILN R                            
    SYSTEM   OS35       SMFID    OS35     CONSOLE INTERNAL CONID   000         
    HANDLED  Y          SUPPRESS N        CTO     N        RULESEC NONE IOADMIN
    REC.TYPE S          J3FLG    F        SPEC             ENVIR.  000         
    REPLY    0000       HCID              DESC    0000     MCSF    C000        
    ROUTE    80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00                   
    WRAP IOA 0265       W.EXT 0265        RBA  00221F      EV.COUNT 144329     
 COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO  '/' 09.08.28

The Debug display type is intended for use in solving problems that cannot be solved without contacting Customer Support. In this case, a list of the Automation Log using this display type should be sent to your BMC Customer Support.

Fields in the Debug (B) Display Type

The B display type displays most of the fields shown in the A display type, together with several additional fields with contents that can be of use to Customer Support. For more information, refer to "Fields of Display Type A (All Fields)" in Display Type A (All Fields).

The additional fields for use by Customer Support are

  • WRAP.IOA

  • W.EXT

  • RBA

  • EV.COUNT

Commands of the Automation Log Screen

In addition to the DISPLAY (DI) command explained in Changing Display Types, the following commands can be specified in the COMMAND field of the Automation Log screen.

Table 57 Commands of the Automation Log Screen

Command

Description

SHOW

Activates the specified screen filter, opens the Automation Log Show Screen window, or opens the Display Filters window, depending on the format of the command. For more information, see Filtering the Automation Log Screen Display.

Valid formats are:

  • SHOW filter_name EDIT — opens the Automation Log Show Screen window for the specified SHOW filter

  • SHOW filter_name — activates the specified SHOW filter

  • SHOW (PF02/PF14) — opens the Automation Log Show Screen window for the active SHOW filter

  • SHOW ? — opens the Display Filters window
    This window lists all available SHOW filters.

The reserved filter name DEFAULT can be used to activate or edit the default SHOW filter for the status screen. Only records that conform to the selection criteria specified in the filter are displayed in the Automation Log screen.

SEARCH

Activates the specified screen filter, opens the Automation Log Search Screen window, or opens the Display Filters window, depending on the format of the command. For more information on filtering the Automation Log Screen,see Filtering the Automation Log Screen Display.

Valid formats are:

  • SEARCH filter_name EDIT — opens the Automation Log Search Screen window for the specified search filter

  • SEARCH filter_name — activates the specified SEARCH filter

  • SEARCH — opens the Automation Log Search Screen window for the active SEARCH filter

  • SEARCH ? — opens the Display Filters window
    This window lists all available SEARCH filters

The reserved filter name DEFAULT can be used to activate or edit the default SEARCH filter for the status screen. Only records that conform to the selection criteria specified in the filter are displayed in the Automation Log screen.

ALL [job_name]

If job_name is not specified, the command resets all fields in the Show Option window to their default values, and resets all fields in the Search Option window to blanks. As a result, all Automation Log records are displayed.

IF job_name is specified, where job_name is a name, mask, or prefix for job name selection, the command resets all fields in the Show Option window to default values, and resets all fields in the Search Option window to blanks, and then selects for display only those records with a parent task name that conforms to the specified job name. For example, ALL PROD* means that only messages and commands originating from jobs with names beginning with PROD are displayed.

AUTO

The AUTO command automatically refreshes the screen after a specified interval. When the command is issued with no parameter, the default interval time will be the value set for the INTERVAL parameter in CTOPARM.

For more information, see AutoRefresh Mode.

LIMIT

The LIMIT command limits the Automation Log search to a specified number of records.

The format of the command is LIMIT nnn. In this command, nnn is the number of records. If nnn is not specified, the limit is set (or reset) to 10,000 records.

If the search limit is reached and insufficient records that fit the SHOW criteria or the FIND criteria have been selected, the Search Limit window is opened and you can choose to stop or continue the search. For more information, see Search Limit Window.

LOCATE

The LOCATE command (abbreviated LO) locates the first Automation Log record with a creation time that matches the specified time. That record becomes the first record in the display.

The format of the command is LOCATE hhmmss. In this command

  • hh are hours

  • mm are minutes

  • ss are seconds

hhmmss can be specified fully (6 digits) or partially (for example, hhmm, hmm, hh, or h). Control-O deciphers the number specified by breaking it into groups of two digits from right to left.

Command

Explanation

LO 114045

The Automation Log display starts from records produced at or after 11:40 a.m. and 45 seconds.

LO 123000/

LO 1230

The Automation Log display starts from records produced at or after 12:30 p.m.

LO 100000/

LO 1000/

LO 10

The Automation Log display starts from records produced at or after 10:00 a.m.

LO 10000/

LO 100/

LO 01/

LO 1

The Automation Log display starts from records produced at or after 1:00 a.m.

If no specific time is entered, the first record displayed is the first record of the current day, for which the creation time is 0.

TRACE

The TRACE command (abbreviated T) alternately hides or displays the trace of Control-O rules while displaying the rest of the Automation Log.

TRACE ONLY

The TRACE ONLY command (abbreviated T ON) displays only trace records. To reset the switch so that all records of the Automation Log are displayed, specify the TRACE (T) command following T ON.

WRAP

The WRAP command causes the message text field information to be alternately wrapped or not wrapped to the next lines. Text which is not wrapped can be viewed by using the scroll right PFKey (PF11/PF23).

SWAP

The SWAP command is used to view one of the following:

  • a previous version of the Automation Log (DSN) on the current system that was backed up using the CTOALOCP utility

  • the default operational Automation Log of another system, where the IOA installation on the specified system is the same as the IOA installation for the current system
    This is valid only in a shared DASD environment, where the Automation Log file from different systems is accessible.

Valid formats are:

  • SWAP — displays the Swap Option window, which is shown in Figure40.
    This window is used to specify the Automation Log to be viewed.

    In the Swap Option window, enter one of the following:

    • the name of the Automation Log (DSN) on the current system you want to view

    • the SMFID for the default operational Automation Log you want to view (from 1 through 4 characters only)

    • a blank value to view the default operational Automation Log for the current system

  • SWAP DSN=dsn_name — displays the Automation Log specified
    dsn_name is a valid Automation Log (DSN) name.

  • SWAP SMF=smf_id — displays the default operational Automation Log of the SMF ID specified
    smf_id is a valid SMFID.

OPER

The OPER command displays the MVS Operlog. This command is valid only when working in a Sysplex environment. Messages in the Operlog are displayed in the same format as the Control-O Automation log, and most commands and display types available in the Automation log are available while displaying the Operlog messages. For more information, see MVS Operlog Display.

/
MVSCMD

The / command, or the MVSCMD command, which is the alias for the / command, enable the operator to issue MVS operator commands, or VM commands if MVS is operating under VM, from non-console terminals.

Valid formats are:

  • / or MVSCMD — Displays a window which allows you to enter the MVS or VM command.

  • / mvs_command or MVSCMD mvs_command mvs_command is the text of the MVS or VM command to be issued. There is a space between the MVSCMD command and the command text.

  • // — Displays the Operator’s Menu screen that includes a list of preset operator commands.

This screen is also accessible using the OPERATOR option in the Control-O Automation Options Facility (OA) screen. For more information, see The OPERATOR Option.

To issue the MVS or VM command, enter command / or MVSCMD at the command prompt. The window shown in Figure 41 is displayed.

Do one of the following:

  • If you entered the / command or the MVSCMD command without the accompanying command text, specify the MVS or VM command in the CMD field of the window. Beginning with the first CMD field line, you can specify up to 44 characters in each of the two lines, as necessary. Press Enter. The command is executed, and the Operator Command screen, containing the results of the command execution, is displayed. The Operator Command screen is shown in Figure42.

  • If you entered the / command or the MVSCMD command with the accompanying command text, the text appears in the CMD field. Press Enter. The command is executed, and the Operator Command screen, containing the results of the command execution, is displayed. The Operator Command screen is shown in Figure42.

For information on using the Operator Command screen, refer to The OPERATOR Option

The / command or MVSCMD command uses the EMCS console to issue the MVS or VM command under your user ID. Another console may already be active under your user ID because you did one of the following:

  • You issued another MVS or VM command from SDSF under the same user ID.

  • You have previously activated a console using the Automation Opts (OA) CONSOLE option.

In either case, the console response may not be displayed in the Operator Command screen. In all cases, however, the response is displayed in the Automation Log screen.

Figure 40 Automation Log Screen SWAP Option Window

Copy
FILTER:            ----------> AUTOMATION LOG SMF=OS35 <--------< D >------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 120900 - 120900
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
120900 151928 A60AS     -A60AS    JOB SERVICE TOTALS        1589       03.63  
120900 151928 INIT      ICH70001I M26C     LAST ACCESS AT 14:38:27 ON TUESDAY,
120900 151928 A60AS     $HASP395 A60AS    ENDED                               
120900 151929 Esssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss+
120900 151929 ×                                                               |
120900 151929 ×   DSN or SMF s>                                               |
120900 151929 ×                                                               |
120900 151929 Dsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss+
120900 151930 N86       -                                        CPU (TOTAL)  
120900 151930 N86       -JOBNAME  STEPNAME PROCSTEP    RC    I/O HH:MM:SS.TH  
120900 151931 N86       -N86      NONCAT2  CONTROLR    00    157       00.15  
120900 151931 N86       -N86      STEP1                00      0       00.02  
120900 151931 N86       IEF404I N86 - ENDED - TIME=15.19.31                   
120900 151931 N86       -                                                     
120900 151931 N86       -N86      JOB SERVICE TOTALS         157       00.17  
120900 151931 N86       $HASP395 N86      ENDED                               
120900 151931 A60GATEW  -                                        CPU (TOTAL)  
120900 151931 A60GATEW  -JOBNAME  STEPNAME PROCSTEP    RC    I/O HH:MM:SS.TH  
120900 151931 A60GATEW  -A60GATEW IOAGATE  GATEWAY     00   1866       02.97  
COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO  '/' 15.21.08

Figure 41 Automation Log Screen MVS Command Window

Copy
FILTER:            ------------- AUTOMATION LOG  --------------< D >-------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                         L===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 140800 - 140800
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
140800 162223 M60TROLM  CTM262W 0009 UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS TO READ JOB DATA BY
140800 162224 V51GATE   ECAPUT: USER N16      ASSIGNED TO ASID 01. SIID 162439
140800 162224 D51AS     CTDS15I USER N16      LOGGED IN                       
140800 162228 D51   +---------------------------------------------------------+
140800 162229 K26   |                                                         |
140800 162231 D51   |  CMD -->                                                |
140800 162232 M52   |      -->                                                |
140800 162232 M52   |                                                         |
140800 162232 M52   +---------------------------------------------------------+
140800 162232 M60TROLM  CTM262W 0012 UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS TO READ JOB DATA BY
140800 162234 M52       IEA631I  OPERATOR M52      NOW INACTIVE, SYSTEM=OS35  
140800 162235 M60TROLM  CTMD50S READING JOB DATA BY IEFSSREQ FAILED 0013 TIMES
140800 162236 N03COMP   STEP LINKEDIT FOR  FRECMC   RC <= 0 .... OK      SYS=V
140800 162237 N03COMP   +EXT3MSG: CCID=BG0063   FUNCTION=GENERATE ELEMENT=FREC
140800 162237 N03COMP   +EXT3MSG:     ENVIRONMENT=IOA500   V504     IOA      L
140800 162238 D51AS     CTDS16I USER N16      LOGGED OUT. USED CPU TIME     0.
140800 162239 M52       IEA630I  OPERATOR M52      NOW ACTIVE,   SYSTEM=OS35  
140800 162239 M52                                                             
140800 162239 M52       IEE305I          COMMAND INVALID                      
COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SMF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO 16.22.42

Figure 42 Operator Command Screen

Copy
---------< D >---------  CONTROL-O - Operator Command --------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> HALF
                          CONSOLE RESPONSE
---> D T
IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=08.48.25 DATE=2000.022  GMT: TIME=06.48.25 DATE=2000.022
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>   NO MORE ENTRIES IN THE LIST     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH(ENTER-KEY)                                        08.52.42

Filtering the Automation Log Screen Display

Screen filters can be used to filter the Automation Log screen display. A filter consists of a set of record selection criteria (selection fields and their values). Only records that conform to the selection criteria specified in the filter are displayed on the screen. The INCONTROL administrator can predefine filters and place them in the General profile.

There are two types of filters for the Automation Log screen: SHOW and SEARCH. You can use these filters together to display a specific set of records.

From the Automation Log screen, you can do any of the following:

  • activate an existing filter using the SHOW or SEARCH command

  • display the list of all available filters using the Display Filters window

  • define multiple filters for the screen using the Automation Log Show Screen and Automation Log Search Screen windows

    User-defined filters belong to, are assigned names by, and can only be activated by, the user who defined them. They are stored in the User profile.

A predefined default SHOW filter, named DEFAULT, is provided for the Automation Log screen. Site-defined defaults determine whether the last filter used or the DEFAULT filter is activated when you reenter the Automation Log screen.

Filtering begins with the first entry currently displayed in the screen and continues downward.

Activating an Existing Filter in the Automation Log screen

When you know the name of the filter, you can use either the SHOW or SEARCH command to activate an existing SHOW or SEARCH filter, respectively. To do this, specify the SHOW or SEARCH command in the COMMAND field as follows:

SHOW name

or

SEARCH name

In these commands, name is the name of the filter to be activated.

To activate the DEFAULT filter, specify DEFAULT as the name of the filter.

Display Filters Window

When you do not know the name of a filter, you can activate a filter from the list of available filters by opening the Display Filters window. This window displays the list of all available filters, which includes global filters that are available to all users, as well as user-defined filters that are only available to the individual user. You can activate a filter from the Display Filters window, or switch to the Automation Log Show Screen window or Automation Log Search Screen window, where you can edit or define a filter.

To enter the Display Filters window, type SHOW ? or SEARCH ? in the COMMAND field of the Automation Log screen and press Enter.

Figure 43 Automation Log Screen Display Filters Window

Copy
FILTER:            ------------- AUTOMATION LOG  --------------< D >-------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 290200 - 290200
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
290200 141922 CONSOLE   141                                 THE DUMP          
290200 141922 CONSOLE   141         81 R 19.55.16 OS35     *81 DSI802A CNM01  
29020+-----------------------------------+                 NCCF SYSTEMOPERATO
29020|          DISPLAY FILTERS          |9.55.13 OS35     *80 ISTEXC200 -DYN
29020| CMD ==>           SCROLL==> CRSR  |                 ENTERED            
29020|  O NAME     DESCRIPTION           | IN BROADCAST DATA SET FOR MAIL     
29020|    CONSOLE  JNAME=CONSOLE         |                                    
29020|    NOSTC    NO STARTED TASKS      |                                    
29020|    CONSOL1                        |3 IS;U                              
29020|    CICS     CICS ONLY             |60,FD3286,SL,NOCOMP,FD3286,LOAD1,IOA
29020| =========>>> BOTTOM <<<========== |                       CPU (TOTAL)  
29020|                                   | PROCSTEP    RC    I/O HH:MM:SS.TH  
29020|                                   | C           04   2112       03.83  
29020|                                   | LINK1       04     54       00.10  
29020|                                   |RUN MODE CHANGED TO  N O R M A L DU
29020|                                   |             00    969       00.52  
29020|                                   | LINK2       08    884       00.42  
29020|  OPTIONS  S  SELECT  E  EDIT      | ENDED - TIME=14.19.43              
29020+-----------------------------------+                                    
COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO      15.20.06

Fields of the Display Filters Window

The Display Filters window contains the following fields:

Table 58 Fields of the Display Filters Window

Field

Description

NAME

Name of the filter as it appears in the General or User profile.

DESCRIPTION

Description of the filter.

Options of the Display Filters Window

To request one of the following options, type the option in the OPT field to the left of the filter name and press Enter.

Table 59 Options of the Display Filters Window

Field

Description

S (SELECT)

Filters which entries are displayed in the Automation Log Screen according to the criteria specified in the selected filter.

E (EDIT)

Opens the Screen Filter window, where the filter criteria are displayed. You can modify the filter criteria.

Exiting the Automation Log Screen Filter Window

You can activate an edited filter with or without saving changes, depending on the value you specify in the SAVE field, as follows:

  • To activate and save the filter, specify Y (Yes) in the SAVE field and press Enter. Changes to the filter are permanently saved, the filter is activated, and the window is closed.

  • To activate the filter without saving it, specify N (No) in the SAVE field and press Enter. Changes are only kept in memory only, and the window is closed.

  • To cancel changes made in the Automation Log Show Screen and the Automation Log Search Screen, use the RESET command (PF04/PF16). The changes are canceled regardless of the value specified in the Save field, the window is closed, and the filter that was previously in effect is restored.

By default, using the END command (PF03/PF15) in the window works like pressing Enter. However, the default can be modified so that END works like RESET.

Automation Log Show Screen and Automation Log Search Screen Windows

The Automation Log Show Screen and Automation Log Search Screen windows in the Automation Log screen enable you to create or modify a filter.

  • To access the currently active filter for editing in either of these windows, open the appropriate window using the SHOW or SEARCH command in the COMMAND field, as follows:

    Copy
    SHOW (PF02/PF14)

    or

    Copy
    SEARCH
  • To access any other filter for editing, open the appropriate window using the SHOW or SEARCH command in the COMMAND field, as follows:

    Copy
    SHOW name EDIT

    or

    Copy
    SEARCH name EDIT

    In these commands, name is the name of the filter to be displayed in the window.

  • To create a new filter, specify the name of the new filter. To create a new filter from an existing filter, call up the existing filter in the Automation Log Show Screen window or Automation Log Search Screen window and edit it as desired, then enter a new name and description in the FILTER and DESC fields.

For more information about the Automation Log Show Screen window, see the following topic, "Automation Log Show Screen and Automation Log Search Screen Windows."

Automation Log Show Screen Window

Figure 44 Automation Log Show Screen Window

Copy
FILTER: +-----------------  AUTOMATION LOG SHOW SCREEN --------------------(OL)
COMMAND | FILTER CICS       SAVE Y (Y/N)  DESC: CICS ONLY                     |
SHOW LI | ID                                                                  |
DATE    | JNAME cics*                                                         |
290200  | JOBID                                                               |
290200  | SYSTEM                                                              |
290200  | USERID                                                              |
290200  | CONSOLE                                                             |
290200  | CONID                                                               |
290200  | MCSF                                                                |
290200  | DESC                                                                |
290200  | ROUTE                                                ROUTE FFFF Y   |
290200  | TSO STC JOB MVS CICS IMS MSG CMD LOG TRACE SHOUT SMS SYSOUT OMG     |
290200  |  Y   Y   Y   Y   Y    Y   Y   Y   Y   Y     Y     Y   Y      Y      |
290200  | ENVIRONMENT                                                         |
290200  | SUPPRESSED     Y   |   NOT SUPPRESSED   Y                           |
290200  | HANDLED        Y   |   NOT HANDLED      Y                           |
290200  | REISSUED       Y   |   NOT REISSUED     Y                           |
290200  | REPLY  CONTROLO  MULTILINE                                          |
290200  | ONLY     ONLY      ONLY                                             |
290200  |   N        N         N                                              |
290200  +---------------------------------------------------------------------+
290200 143323 CONSOLE   798                                      PGN=005  DMN=
COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO      15.19.19   

The Automation Log Show Screen window contains the fields shown in Table 60.

Table 60 Fields of the Automation Log Show Screen Window

Field

Description

FILTER

The user-assigned filter name. The name specified in the Filter field can be modified.

If the filter has unsaved changes in memory, an asterisk (*) appears to the right of the filter name. For more information see "Exiting the Automation Log Screen Filter Window" in Display Filters Window.

SAVE

Whether to save modifications to the filter when closing the window. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes)

  • N (No)

DESC

The user-assigned description of the filter. This description can be modified.

The fields in Table 61 define the selection criteria to be applied to the screen. Specify the appropriate selection criteria.

Table 61 Selection Criteria of the Automation Log Show Screen Window

Criteria

Description

ID

Includes only records selected according to the ID field (the first word of the message or the command). Up to four masks can be specified.

  • ID IST* DFH* — Displays only VTAM and CICS messages.

  • ID F MODIFY — Displays only MODIFY commands.

When the Dealias feature is active, records of type C (Command) are selected after the command has been dealiased while records of type M (Message) are selected by matching their ID value to that of the ID field in the SHOW OPTION window.

For further information on the Dealias feature, see ON COMMAND: Message/Event Selection Parameter, and List of Commands for Which Dealiasing Is Supported

E is specified in the ID field of the SHOW OPTION window. The following records are selected:

  • E commands

  • RESET commands

  • Messages whose first word is E

RESET is specified in the ID field of the SHOW OPTION window. The following records are selected:

  • E commands

  • RESET commands

  • Messages whose first word is RESET

JNAME

Includes only records selected according to the JOBNAME field. Up to four masks can be specified.

JNAME M88* M23 displays only records whose job name is M23 or starts with M88.

JOBID

Includes only records selected according to the JOBID field. Only one value can be specified.

In order to select a job whose job ID is longer than five digits, specify the last five digits of the job ID.

JOBID 234 displays only the records whose job ID is, or ends with, 00234.

JOBID 23456 displays only the records whose job ID is, or ends with, 23456 (such as 0123456).

SYSTEM

Includes only records selected according to the SYSTEM field. Up to four system names or masks can be specified. Each system name can be a maximum of eight characters in length.

SYSTEM SYSA* displays only records whose system name is SYSA or is prefixed by SYSA.

USERID

Includes only records selected according to the USERID field. Up to four user IDs or masks can be specified. Each user ID can be a maximum of eight characters in length.

User ID N25* displays only records where the user ID is N25 or is prefixed by N25.

CONSOLE

Includes only records selected according to the CONSOLE field. Up to four console IDs or masks can be specified. Each console ID can be a maximum of eight characters in length.

CONSOLE N25* displays only records whose console ID is N25 or is prefixed by N25.

CONID

Includes only records which have the specified console ID. Up to three values can be specified.

CONID 10 displays records intended for the console with the ID 10.

MCSF

Includes only records selected according to the MCS flags field. Up to three values can be entered.

MCSF 13 displays WTO messages with the MCS flag 13.

DESC

Includes only WTO messages with the specified descriptor codes. Up to three values can be specified.

DESC 1 8 16 displays messages with a descriptor code of 1, 8, or 16.

ROUTE

Includes only WTO messages coming from the specified route codes. Up to eight values can be specified.

ROUTE 1 90 displays messages with a route code of 1 or 90.

Messages that are sent to all route codes may not be displayed, depending on the value specified in the ROUTE FFFF field (described in this table).

ROUTE FFFF

Indicates whether messages sent to all routes should be displayed, in addition to the messages sent to the routes specified in the ROUTE field (described in this table).

TSO
STC
JOB

Selection is based on the JTYPE field. Valid values for each of these fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the JTYPE field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the JTYPE field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

TSC   STC   JOB

Y    N     N

displays only TSO users related records.

MVS
CICS
IMS

Selection is based on the ENVIR field. Valid values for each of these fields are:  

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the ENVIR (Environment) field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the ENVIR (Environment) field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

MVS   CICS   IMS

N     Y      N

shows only records intercepted by the CICS interface.

CICS and IMS messages are not written to the Syslog. They are intercepted by the Control-O interface and written to the Automation Log file.

MSG
CMD

Selection is based on the TYPE field. Valid values for each of these fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the TYPE field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the TYPE field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

MSG   CMD

  N        Y

causes commands (and not messages) to be displayed.

LOG
TRACE
SHOUT

Selection is based on the REC.TYPE field. Valid values for each of these fields are:  

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the REC.TYPE field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the REC.TYPE field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

LOG   TRACE   SHOUT

Y      N       N

displays only Syslog (Type S) records.

SMS
SYSOUT
OMG

Selection is based on the ENVIR field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the ENVIR (Environment) field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the ENVIR (Environment) field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

SMS   SYSOUT   OMG

  N          Y            Y

Shows only records intercepted by the SYSOUT and OMEGAMON interfaces.

ENVIRONMENT

Selection is based on the ENVIR field. Only messages and commands from the specified environments are displayed. Up to nine environment IDs can be specified.

If no value is specified in this field, messages and commands from all environments are displayed.

SUPPRESSED
NOT SUPPRESSED

Selection is based on the SUPPRESS field. Valid values for each of these fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the SUPPRESS field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the SUPPRESS field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

SUPPRESSED Y NOT SUPPRESSED N

displays only records about suppressed messages and commands.

HANDLED/NOT HANDLED

Selection is based on the HANDLED field. Valid values for each of these fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the HANDLED field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the HANDLED field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

HANDLED Y NOT HANDLED N

displays only records of HANDLED messages and commands.

REISSUED/NOT REISSUED

Selection is based on the J3FLG field. Valid values for each of these fields are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the selection field name matches the J3FLG field.

  • N (No) — Omit the record from display if the selection field name matches the J3FLG field.

Insert the value Y into at least one of these fields.

REISSUED Y NOT REISSUED N

displays JES3 or Sysplex reissued messages.

This option is useful when it is necessary to sort out the locally issued messages from the reissued ones out of the global processor Automation Log.

REPLY ONLY

Selection is based on the REPLY field. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select records for display if the records have non-zero REPLY IDs.

  • N (No) — Record selection is not dependent on the REPLY field.

REPLY ONLY Y

displays only the WTOR message records and the commands that answer them.

CONTROLO ONLY

Selection is based on the CTO field. Valid values for this field are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if Y is specified in the CTO field of the record.

  • N (No) — Record selection is not dependent on the CTO field.

CONTROLO ONLY Y

displays only records of messages and commands issued by Control-O.

MULTILINE ONLY

Selection is based on the MULTILN field. Valid values for this field are:

  • Y (Yes) — Select the record for display if the MULTILN field of the record is equal to F, M, or L.

  • N (No) — Record selection is not dependent on the MULTILN field.

MULTILINE ONLY Y

displays only records of multi-line WTO Messages.

Automation Log Search Screen Window

Figure 45 shows the Automation Log Search Screen Window.

Figure 45 Automation Log Search Screen Window

Copy
FILTER:                      -> AUTOMATION LOG SMF=OS35 <--------< D >-----(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW/SEARCH ON => SEARCH                                   DATE 080701 - 080701
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E ----------------------
080701 122933 I03       V 075,CONSOLE                                         
080701 +------------  AUTOMATION LOG SEARCH SCREEN --------------(OL)+        
080701 | FILTER CICS       SAVE   (Y/N)  DESC: CICS ONLY             |        
080701 |                                                             |ECIFICAT
080701 |  Logical   Character Range  Character             Boolean   |        
080701 |  Operator                   String                Operator  |        
080701 |            From      To                                     |        
080701 |  --------  -----     -----  --------------------  --------  |ECIFICAT
080701 |  EQ        001       128    CONSOLE               OR        | ARE NON
080701 |  EQ        001       003    CTO                             |OLE CTOP
080701 |                                                             | ARE NON
080701 |                                                             |        
080701 |                                                             |OLE CTOP
080701 |                                                             |TROL-O S
080701 +------------------------------------------------------------ +TROL-O S
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 3 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O S
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 4 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O S
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 5 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O S
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 21 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O 
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 22 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O 
080701 123025 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 23 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O 
080701 123026 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 24 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O 
080701 123026 CONSOLE   CTO282I TEST NUMERO 25 DE MESSAGES POUR     CONTROL-O 
COMMANDS: ALL  LIMIT  LOCATE  SHOW  SHPF  SWAP  TRACE  WRAP  AUTO  '/' 18.47.07

The Automation Log Search Screen window contains the fields shown in Table 62.

Table 62 Fields of the Automation Log Search Screen Window

Field

Description

FILTER

The user-assigned name of the filter. The name specified in this field can be modified.

If the filter has unsaved changes in memory, an asterisk (*) appears to the right of the filter name. For more information, see "Exiting the Automation Log Screen Filter Window" in Display Filters Window.

SAVE (Y/N)

Whether to save modifications to the filter when closing the window. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes)

  • N (No)

DESC.

The user-assigned description of the filter. This description can be modified.

The following fields define the logical (Boolean) relations to be applied to the screen. Up to five logical relations can be specified. Only records that match all relations are displayed.

Table 63 Logical relations of the Automation Log Search Screen Window

Field

Description

Logical Operator

Defines the current logical relation. Valid values are

  • EQ — equal to

  • NE — not equal to

  • LT — less than

  • GT — greater than

  • LE — less than or equal to

  • GE — greater than or equal to

Character Range

From       To

The range of positions for the first argument of the logical relation. For more information, see "Character Range Interpretation" below.

  • From — first position

  • To — last position

Character String

Second argument of the logical relation. From 1 through 20 characters.

Boolean Operator

Boolean value that connects the current logical relation with the next one. Valid values are

  • AND

  • OR

Character Range Interpretation

The character range values defined by the From and To fields vary depending on the logical operator they are used with, as follows.

  • For logical operators LT, GT, LE, and GE, the From and To values specify the exact first and last positions of the substring that is the first member of a logical relation.

    For example, to display only messages from the $HASP200 and $HASP400 interval, use the following logical relations:

    Copy
    Logical   Character Range  Character            Boolean
    Operator                   String               Operator

              From      To

    --------  -----     -----  --------------------  --------

    LT        001       008    $HASP400              AND

    GT        001       008    $HASP200
  • For logical operators EQ and NE, the From and To values limit the search to a substring within a string.

    For example, to display all strings that contain the substring "$HASP," use the following logical relation:

    Copy
    EQ        001       128    $HASP

Swap Option Window

The SWAP Option window is used to swap between different versions of the Automation Log (that is, between the currently displayed log and a previous log that was backed up using the CTOALOCP utility).

Entering SWAP in the COMMAND field of the Automation Log screen opens the Swap Option window, which is shown in Figure 46.

Figure 46 Swap Option Window

Copy
-------------< D >------------- AUTOMATION LOG  ---------------------------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 020200 - 020200
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME  ------------------- M E S S A G E ----------------------
020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144714 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144714 CON   +---------------------------------------------------------+
020200 144721 RES   |                                                         |
020200 144721 RES   |  DSN -->                                                |
020200 144751 TSO   |                                                         |
020200 144751 TSO   +---------------------------------------------------------+
020200 144756           626 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
020200 144756           626   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL
020200 144759 M06C      627 ICH408I USER(M06C    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
020200 144759 M06C      627   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL L3042
020200 144759 JES2      $HASP100 M06C     ON TSOINRDR
020200 144759 M06C      $HASP373 M06C     STARTED
020200 144800 M06C      IEF125I M06C - LOGGED ON - TIME=14.48.00
020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144814 CONSOLE   D T
020200 144814 CONSOLE   IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=14.48.14 DATE=2000.157  GMT: TIME=
CMDS: SHOW, SHPF, ALL, LIMIT, LOCATE, TRACE, WRAP, SWAP                15.46.16

Type the name of an Automation Log data set in the DSN field and press Enter to request the change and close the window. The specified data set is displayed.

Specified Automation Log data sets must have been created by the CTOALOCP utility.

If the DSN field is left blank, the default operational Automation Log is displayed.

Search Limit Window

The Search Limit Window is opened automatically when a specified maximum number of records have been searched, and the number of records that match the selection criteria does not fill the screen. This maximum number of records can be specified with the LIMIT command. If a LIMIT is not specified, the default value is 1000 records.

Figure 47 Search Limit Window

Copy
-------------< D >------------- AUTOMATION LOG  ---------------------------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 020200 - 020200
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME  ------------------- M E S S A G E ----------------------
020200 122727 M81A      +CTD160I CONTROL-D RECIPIENT TREE LOADED -    127 RECI
020200 122735 TSO       LOGON
020200 122735 TSO       LOGON
020200 122737           771 ICH408I USER(M35A    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
020200 122737           771   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL
020200 122738 M35A      772 ICH408I USER(M35A    ) GROUP(        ) NAME(???
020200 122738 M35A      772   LOGON/JOB INITIATION - USER AT TERMINAL LX034
020200 122739 JES2      $HASP1 +----------------------------------------------+
020200 122739 M70A      D U,,, |                                              |
020200 122739 M70A      D U,,, |   NUMBER OF SEARCHED RECORDS:   001000       |
020200 122739 *MASTER*  775 IE |   NUMBER OF SELECTED RECORDS:   000010       |
020200 122739 *MASTER*  775 UN |                                              |
020200 122739 *MASTER*  775 46 |   PLEASE SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:        |
020200 122740 M35A      $HASP3 |                                              |
020200 122740 TSO       LOGON  |   1 - STOP SEARCH IMMEDIATELY                |
020200 122740 TSO       LOGON  |   2 - ASK AGAIN AFTER 000002 RECORDS         |
020200 122740 M35A      IEF125 |   3 - UNCONDITIONAL SEARCH                   |
020200 122741           779 IC |                                              |
020200 122741           779    +----------------------------------------------+
CMDS: SHOW, SHPF, ALL, LIMIT, LOCATE, TRACE, WRAP, SWAP                12.28.12

The window displays the number of records searched and the number of records that match the selection criteria for display.

To perform a search, select one of the following choices and press Enter:

Copy
3 - UNCONDITIONAL SEARCH

performs an uninterrupted search of all records.

The search is stopped immediately when you select Option 1.

Copy
2 - ASK AGAIN AFTER number RECORDS

searches the specified number of records, and then pauses.

  • Continue the search by pressing Enter.

  • Stop the search by selecting Option 1 (Stop Search Immediately).

If any records are found, the records are displayed.

When you first choose Option 2, you can change the search limit by changing the value in the Number of Records field.

If you change the value of Number of Records to 999999, the Search Limit window will not open when you reenter the Automation Log Screen. To see the Search Limit window again, use LIMIT to specify a number lower than 999999.

During the search, the following information is displayed at the bottom of the window:

  • the number of searched records
    Lists the cumulative number of records searched. For example, if you perform three searches with a specified number of 10, the figure displayed is30.

  • the number of selected records
    Lists the cumulative number of records selected that match the search criteria for display.

MVS Operlog Display

The MVS Operlog is a log that contains the system logs of all computers in a Sysplex environment. The Operlog is an optional feature in a Sysplex environment.

When operating with the Operlog active in a Sysplex environment, the OS/39O Operlog can be viewed by issuing the OPER command from the Automation Log screen.

The screen shown in Figure 48 is displayed when the OPER command is issued from the Default display of the Automation Log screen.

Figure 48 MVS Operlog Display

Copy
------------------------------      OPERLOG     --------------< D >--------(OL)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 060600 - 060600
DATE   TIME   JOBNAME   ------------------ M E S S A G E  ---------------------
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP250 M80A PURGED -- (JOB KEY WAS AF9E8C1E)
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP250 M80 PURGED -- (JOB KEY WAS AF9F0955)
060600 103317 M80       $CT3879,OUTGRP=1.1.1
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP608 M80A     AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 AN
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP250 M80A PURGED -- (JOB KEY WAS AF9FC7E6)
060600 103317 M80       $CT3878,OUTGRP=2.1.1
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP608 M80      AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 AN
060600 103317 JES2      $HASP250 M80 PURGED -- (JOB KEY WAS AF9FC7E5)
060600 103744 RESOLVE   AMTSM2I SMF DATA SETS FULL-SMF NOT RECORDING, RUN SMF
060600 103744 RESOLVE   AMTSQ3I TOTAL ECSA 9680K, CURRENTLY USED 8312K ( 86%)
060600 103811 M80A      IEA995I SYMPTOM DUMP OUTPUT
060600 103811 M80A      SYSTEM COMPLETION CODE=0C4  REASON CODE=00000011
060600 103811 M80A       TIME=10.38.11  SEQ=00185  CPU=0000  ASID=003D
060600 103811 M80A       PSW AT TIME OF ERROR  078D2000   85AD87AE  ILC 4  INT
060600 103811 M80A         ACTIVE LOAD MODULE           ADDRESS=05AD6188  OFFS
060600 103811 M80A         NAME=IOATDRV
060600 103811 M80A         DATA AT PSW  05AD87A8 - 60004780  A0D2BFFF  6040478
060600 103811 M80A         GPR  0-3  000010A8  05B52CE8  05B68339  05B68778
060600 103811 M80A         GPR  4-7  05B68FFC  00000000  000C44C8  00000000
COMMANDS: ALL , LIMIT , LOCATE , SHOW , SHPF , SWAP , TRACE , WRAP     12.13.57

The Operlog screen contains many of the same fields as the Automation Log screen.

Most commands and display types that are available in the Automation Log screen are also available in the Operlog screen. However, the Debug display type and the TRACE, TRACE ONLY, SEARCH, and SWAP commands are not relevant for the Operlog screen.

For a description of the field commands and display types of this screen, see the description of the Automation Log screen above.

To exit the Operlog screen and return to the Automation Log screen, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Automation Options Facility

The Control-O Automation Options facility provides a set of operator productivity tools that facilitate operation of the system and access to automation data. The facility allows selection of functions that display, modify or act upon IOA components or system components.

To display the Automation Options menu, which is shown in Figure 49, type OA on the IOA Primary Option menu and press Enter.

Figure 49 Automation Options Menu

Copy
-----------------------  CONTROL-O AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------< D >--------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
O OPTION                         DESCRIPTION
  COMMAND   Enter Console Command
  CONSOLE   Display Contents of MVS Consoles
  ENQINFO   Display Enqueue Information
  GLOBALS   Display CONTROL-O Global AutoEdit Variables
  OPERATOR  Operator Commands and Responses
  SAMPLES   Examples of Automation Options Implementation
  SERVERS   CONTROL-O Servers Status Screen
  SUBSYS    List MVS Subsystems
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>    NO MORE ENTRIES IN THE LIST    <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
SELECT AN OPTION AND PRESS ENTER                                       15.36.53

A list of automation options is displayed. Select an option by specifying S (Select) to the left of the desired option and pressing Enter.

Options supplied with the product are described in the following pages. Additional options can be added by the customer, and the hierarchy of screens can be customized. For a full description on how to add and modify options, see the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

The SAMPLES option is not described in the following pages. It contains a series of sample automation options that demonstrate how customized automation options can be used to activate other facilities.

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

The COMMAND Option

The COMMAND option enables the operator to issue MVS operator commands, or VM commands if MVS is operating under VM, from non-console terminals.

To issue such a command from any terminal under which Control-O is active, specify S (Select) to the left of the COMMAND option in the Automation Options menu and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 50 is opened.

Figure 50 Automation Options OPTION Command Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
S COMMAND    Enter Console Command
  CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
  ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
  GLO |                                                                    |
  OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
  SAM |                                                                    |
  SER |   Command       ===>                                               |
  SUB |                 ===>                                               |
===== |                                                                    |===
      +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
Select an OPTION and press ENTER                                       17.07.45

Specify the desired MVS or VM command in the COMMAND field of the window. Beginning with the first COMMAND field line, you can specify up to 44 characters in each of the two lines, as necessary.

Press Enter. The command is executed, and the Operator Command screen, containing the results, is displayed.

Operator Command Screen

The Operator Command screen is displayed after specifying an MVS or VM command using the COMMAND option in the Automation Options facility. The screen displays the results of the specified MVS or VM command.

Figure 51 Operator Command Screen

Copy
---------< D >---------  CONTROL-O - Operator Command --------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> HALF
                          CONSOLE RESPONSE
   ---> D T
IEE136I LOCAL: TIME=08.48.25 DATE=2000.022  GMT: TIME=06.48.25 DATE=2000.022
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>   NO MORE ENTRIES IN THE LIST     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH(ENTER-KEY)                                        08.52.42

The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • The command, as entered, is displayed on the first one or two lines.

  • The console response, as it would appear had the operator specified the command from the console, is displayed on subsequent lines.

After the command has been entered, Control-O waits a preset length of time before displaying the console response. If the console response is relatively slow, or the output relatively large, a partial response may be displayed at first. In this case, refresh the screen using the REFRESH command (PF04/PF16 or Enter) periodically until the complete console response has been displayed.

The CONSOLE Option

The CONSOLE option displays an image of an MVS console on the screen. The console be selected by console ID or by console name (in MVS/SP4).

To display a console image on the screen, type S (Select) to the left of the CONSOLE option in the Automation Options menu and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 52 is opened.

Figure 52 Automation Options CONSOLE Option Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
  COMMAND    Enter Console Command
S CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
  ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
  GLO |                                                                    |
  OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
  SAM |                                                                    |
  SER |   Console ID   ===>  01                                            |
  SUB |   Console Name ===>                                                |
===== |                                                                    |===
      +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
Select an OPTION and press ENTER                                      06.55.37

Specify the console with the image that should be displayed by typing either a console ID or a console name (but not both) in the window and pressing Enter. The default is Console ID=01. The Console Display screen is displayed.

Console Display Screen

The Console Display screen displays the image of the console selected through the CONSOLE option in the Automation Options facility. Since the screen displays the same image as the console, only one display type is defined, namely the D (Default) display type.

The Console Display screen is shown in Figure 53.

Figure 53 Console Display Screen

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O CONSOLE Display       -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> HALF
                                   Console Lines
         @STC20411 *38 DSI802A CNM01    REPLY WITH VALID NCCF SYSTEM OPERATOR
         @ COMMAND
         @JOB20501 *45 IEC301A S JOB N01ANSKL,STEP SORT    ,DDNAME SORTOUT
         @JOB20528 *IEF233A M 460,FD1466,,FD1466,COPY,CTT.INSTCTT
        - JOB20538  IEF404I M56FREP - ENDED - TIME=12.21.41
        - JOB20545  $HASP373 M56FREP  STARTED - INIT  2 - CLASS A - SYS ESA1
          JOB20161  $HASP608 M23ASREP AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          TSU19909  $HASP608 M23A     AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20213  $HASP608 M23ASREP AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20214  $HASP608 M23ASREP AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20282  $HASP608 M23TSCBT AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20318  $HASP608 M23COPYX AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20321  $HASP608 M23AEX   AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20413  $HASP608 M23XCTB  AWAITING HARDCOPY         PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20413  $HASP608 M23XCTB  AWAITING HARDCOPY         PRIO  1 ANY
          JOB20405  $HASP608 M23COPYX AWAITING PURGE            PRIO  1 ANY
                    IKJ574I   NO SPACE IN BROADCAST DATA SET FOR MAIL
      00  JOB20524  MIM1038 M78ASMNR CONTENTION WITH M78B OWNS SHR  ON ESA
          JOB20524  MIM1039 M78ASMNR NEEDS EXCL SYSDSN   CTMW.WORKD.SIMOAJF
         @JOB20524 *MIM1040 M78ASMNR WAITING FOR RESOURCES FOR 6 MINUTES
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH, AUTO                                             12.22.12

The ENQINFO Option — Enqueue Information

The ENQINFO option is used to display ENQ (Enqueue) information, that is, information on who is holding a resource and who is waiting for a resource. You can specify selection criteria to limit the type and amount of ENQ information displayed.

Type S (Select) to the left of the ENQINFO option on the Automation Options menu and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 54 is opened. It contains selection criteria.

Figure 54 Automation Options ENQINFO Option Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
 O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
   COMMAND    Enter Console Command
   CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
 S ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   GLO |                                                                    |
   OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
   SAM |                                                                    |
   SER |   Request        ==> CONFLICT                                      |
   SUB |   Scope          ==> ALL                                           |
 ===== |   Qname (Major)  ==>                                               |===
       |   Rname (Minor)  ==>                                               |
       |   Rname cont.    ==>                                               |
       |   Jobname        ==>                                               |
       |   Timing (Y/N)   ==> N                                             |
       |                                                                    |
       +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
   
   
   
Select an OPTION and press ENTER                                      07.27.14

Initial values are specified for the fields that are mandatory. The selection criteria can be changed by specifying new values and pressing Enter.

Available selection criteria are shown in Table 64.

Table 64 Selection Criteria of the ENQINFO Option Window

Criteria

Description

Request

ENQ request. Mandatory. Valid values are:

  • CONFLICT — ENQ conflicts are selected, that is, jobs holding resources for which other jobs are waiting. Default.

  • WAITER — Jobs waiting for resources are selected.

  • OWNER — Jobs that own resources are selected.

  • LOCK — Deadlocked jobs (that is, where one job holds resources for which another job is waiting) are selected.

  • ALL — All ENQ entries are selected.

Scope

Scope of ENQ entries selected. Mandatory. Valid values are:

  • STEP — STEP level

  • SYSTEM — SYSTEM level

  • SYSTEMS — SYSTEMS level

  • ALL — ENQ entries of all three levels above are selected. Default.

Qname

Queue name or mask (major name of the resource), such as, SYSDSN or SYSVSAM. Initially set to blanks. Optional.

Rname

Resource name or mask (minor name of the resource). Initially set to blanks. Optional.

The length of Rname is determined as follows:

  • If the name is between two single quotation marks, the length is the number of characters between the quotation marks (including leading and trailing blanks).

  • If the name is not between quotation marks, the actual length is the number of characters, from the first position in the Rname field (including blanks, if any) to the last non-blank character in the field.

Rname cont

Rname can be continued to a total of 88 characters.

Jobname

Job name or mask which issued the ENQ. Initially set to blanks. Optional.

Timing (Y/N)

Determines whether or not the time jobs wait for a resource is calculated. Mandatory. Valid values are:

  • N (No) — Time is not calculated. Default.

  • Y (Yes) — Time is calculated.

The calculated time is the time a job waits for a resource, from first invocation of the ENQ Information screen until its latest REFRESH.

Change parameters, if desired, and press Enter to close the window. The ENQ Information screen is displayed.

ENQ Information Screen

The ENQ Information screen displays the selected enqueue information.

Up and down scrolling conventions are supported.

Two predefined display types (described in the following paragraphs) are available for the ENQ Information screen.

Changing Display Types

While in the ENQ Information screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is DISPLAY x. In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

DI A displays the All Fields display type.

Valid predefined display types are

  • D — Default display type

  • A — All Fields display type

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 55 ENQINFO Option Display Type D (Default)

Copy
------< D >-------  CONTROL-O - ENQ Information - Option=S ---------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
    O JOBNAME STA TYP SCOPE   QNAME    RNAME
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTW.TEST.FD1211.SRC
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTDW.WORKD.PRMUSR
      SMS      O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS1.DFSMS.ACDS
      W3PGATE  O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   IOAP.TEST.NSN
      I4ZSMON  O   E  SYSTEMS IOAZ410  DEVICE.460
      M06C     O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTDW.WORKD.ATF
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   M31.UNDEL100.ASM
      M4WTROLM O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTMW.WORKD.CKP
      M06C     O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTMW.WORKD.CKP
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTT.TLMSAG.EARL
      EDDTROLD O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   EDD.TEST.COM
      EDDPRINT O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   EDD.TEST.COM
      LLA      O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS2.LINKLIB
      M06C     O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   IOAW.WORKI.MSG
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   M54.VSAM.FILE1
      M56FCMP  O   E  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   CTOW.WORKO.GLB.CPUESA1
      M00      O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS2.EXEC
      M42B     O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS2.EXEC
      M80      O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS2.EXEC
      N38      O   S  SYSTEM  SYSDSN   SYS2.EXEC
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH                                                   15.52.05

Fields in the Default (D) Display Type

The information shown in Table 65 is displayed.

Table 65 Fields of the ENQ Information Screen Display Type D (Default)

Field

Description

<D>

Indicates the Default display type.

O (OPTION)

For future use.

JOBNAME

Name of the job that issued the ENQ.

STATUS

Status of the job. Valid values are:

  • O — The job owns the resource.

  • W — The job is waiting for the resource.

An R (RESERVE) character appearing next to the status indicates a RESERVE condition on the disk.

TYPE

Resource type. Valid values are:

  • E — Exclusive

  • S — Shared

SCOPE

Scope of the ENQ entry. Mandatory. Valid values are:

  • STEPS — STEP level

  • SYSTEM — SYSTEM level

  • SYSTEMS — SYSTEMS level

  • ALL — ENQ entries of all three levels above are selected. Default.

QNAME

Resource major name.

RENAME

First 44 characters of the resource name.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Figure 56 shows an example of the All Fields display type for the ENQ Information screen. This display type is requested by typing the DISPLAY A command (abbreviated DI A) in the COMMAND field of the screen.

Figure 56 Example of the ENQ Information All Fields Display Type (A)

Copy
------< A >-------  CONTROL-O - ENQ Information - Option=S ---------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     O JOBNAME  QNAME    RNAME
       M19A     SPFEDIT  M19A.ISPF.ISPPROF                           ISREDRT
           STATUS   O  ASID  0194 TYPE     E             SCOPE     SYSTEMS
           RANGE    L             SYSNAME  ESA1          WAIT TIME 00000000
           HELD BY
   
       M19A     SPFEDIT  M19A.ISPF.ISPPROF                           ISREDIT
           STATUS   O  ASID  0194 TYPE     E             SCOPE     SYSTEMS
           RANGE    L             SYSNAME  ESA1          WAIT TIME 00000000
           HELD BY
   
       M19      SPFEDIT  CTO.WORK.SRC                                CTOTAOP
           STATUS   O  ASID  0072 TYPE     E             SCOPE     SYSTEMS
           RANGE    L             SYSNAME  ESA1          WAIT TIME 00000000
           HELD BY
   
       M19      SPFEDIT  CTO.WORK.SRC                                CTOTCSE
           STATUS   O  ASID  0072 TYPE     E             SCOPE     SYSTEMS
           RANGE    L             SYSNAME  ESA1          WAIT TIME 00000000
           HELD BY
   
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH                                                   15.55.58

Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type

The information shown in Table 66 is displayed.

Table 66 Fields of the ENQ Information Screen Display Type A (All Fields)

Field

Description

<A>

Indicates the All Fields display type.

O (OPTION)

For future use.

JOBNAME

Name of the job that issued the ENQ.

QNAME

Resource major name.

RNAME

First 44 characters of the resource name.

STATUS

Status of the job. Valid values are:

  • O — Job owns the resource

  • W — Job is waiting for the resource

An R (RESERVE) character appearing next to the status indicates a RESERVE condition on the disk.

ASID

Address space ID of the job that issued the ENQ.

TYPE

Resource type. Valid values are:

  • E — Exclusive

  • S — Shared

SCOPE

Scope of the ENQ entry. Mandatory. Valid values are:

  • STEP — STEP level

  • SYSTEM — SYSTEM level

  • SYSTEMS — SYSTEMS level

  • ALL — ENQ entries of all three levels above are selected. Default.

RANGE

Range of the ENQ entry. Valid values are:

  • L — Local request

  • G — Global request

SYSNAME

Name of the system associated with the ENQ entry.

WAIT TIME

Time, in seconds, that the job has been waiting for a resource, from first invocation of the ENQ Information screen to its most recent refresh. Exiting and reentering the screen resets this field.

HELD BY

Names of up to six jobs which own the resource for which the job is waiting.

Commands of the ENQ Information Screen

Table 67 Commands of the ENQ Information Screen

Command

Description

SHPF

The SHPF command shows the current PFKey assignments.

REFRESH

The REFRESH command (PF04/PF16) refreshes the screen. In addition to providing new ENQ information, this command is very useful because it allows display of job waiting time, calculated as a time difference between the current refresh and the first invocation of the ENQ Information screen.

AUTO

The AUTO command periodically refreshes the screen automatically after a specified interval. For more information, see AutoRefresh Mode.

The GLOBALS Option

The GLOBALS option displays the values of Control-O Global AutoEdit variables. Variables can be selected for display by either their individual name or mask, or by pool name or mask.

To select variables for display, type S (Select) to the left of the GLOBALS option in the Automation Options menu and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 57 is opened.

Figure 57 Automation Options GLOBALS Option Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
  COMMAND    Enter Console Command
  CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
  ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
S GLO |                                                                    |
  OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
  SAM |                                                                    |
  SER |   VARIABLE MASK ===> *                                             |
  SUB |   POOLID        ===> $GLOBAL                                       |
===== |   SYSTEM NAME   ===> CURRENT                                       |===
      +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
Select an OPTION and press ENTER                                      08.20.50

The window contains the required fields shown in Table 68. Default values are displayed.

Table 68 Fields of the GLOBALS Option Window

Field

Description

VARIABLE MASK

Name of Global variable or mask that determines the group of Global variables to be displayed. Default: * (display all Global variables).

POOLID

Name or mask of the members that contains the Global variables to be displayed. Default: $GLOBAL.

SYSTEM NAME

Name of the system within the Sysplex from which XAE TYPE 1 Database AutoEdit Variables are displayed.
Default: CURRENT (system on which the user is currently logged).

This field is valid only when displaying TYPE 1 XAE databases. For other AutoEdit Variables, (including XAE TYPE 2 Databases), where the SYSTEM NAME is not CURRENT, databases that are not TYPE 1 will not be displayed.

For more information about the XAE facility, see Using an XAE AutoEdit Variable Database.

Change the default values, if desired, and press Enter. The Globals Display screen is displayed.

Globals Display Screen

The Globals Display screen displays the values of Control-O Global AutoEdit variables selected through the GLOBALS option in the Automation Options facility. Two predefined display types (described in the following sections) are available for the Globals Display screen.

Changing Display Types

While in the Globals Display screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

DI A displays the ALL FIELDS display type.

Valid predefined display types are

  • D — Default display type

  • A — All Fields display type

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 58 is an example of the Default display type for the Globals Display screen.

Figure 58 Example of the GLOBALS Option Default Display Type (D)

Copy
-----------< D >-------  CONTROL-O - Global Variables  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> HALF
      NAME                           VALUE
      USER_RULER                     ----+----1
      STATUS_CICS                    ACTIVE   123418 000406
      INIT_NUM                       20
      STATUS_IDMS                    ACTIVE
      SMFID_IDMS                     SYS2
      CTO_RELOAD_DONE                000406
      ABEND_COUNT                    2
      CICS_NAME                      CICSTEST
      USER_RULER2                    ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+-
      DTAPE_TIME                     141723 000410
      DEVNAME_3400                   TAPE
      DEVNAME_3490                   CART
      DEVNAME_348S                   CART
      RESNAME_TAPE                   TAPE
      RESNAME_CART                   CART
      DEV_1                          TAPE
      DEV_2                          CART
      DEV_O_TAPE                     0
      DEV_T_TAPE                     0
      DEV_O_CART                     0
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH                                                   10.08.08

Fields in the Default (D) Display Type

The fields in the GLOBALS option Default display type (D) are shown in Table 69.

Table 69 Fields of the GLOBALS Option Display Type D (Default)

Field

Description

<D>

Indicates the Default display type.

Name

Name of the Global variable.

Value

Value of the Global variable.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Figure 59 shows an example of the All Fields display type for the Globals Display screen. This display type is requested by typing the DISPLAY A command (abbreviated DI A) in the COMMAND field of the screen.

Figure 59 Example of the GLOBALS Option Display Type A (All Fields)

Copy
   -----------< A >-------  CONTROL-O - Global Variables  -------------------(OA)
  COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> HALF
    NAME                           POOLID   VALUE
    USER_RULER1                    $GLOBAL  ----+----1
    STATUS_CICS                    $GLOBAL  ACTIVE   123418 000606
    INIT_NUM                       $GLOBAL  20
    STATUS_IDMS                    $GLOBAL  ACTIVE
    SMFID_IDMS                     $GLOBAL  SYS2
    CTO_RELOAD_DONE                $GLOBAL  000606
    ABEND_COUNT                    $GLOBAL  2
    CICS_NAME                      $GLOBAL  CICSTEST
    USER_RULER2                    $GLOBAL  ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+-  
    DTAPE_TIME                     DEVICES  141723 000606
    DEVNAME_3400                   DEVICES  TAPE
    DEVNAME_3490                   DEVICES  CART
    DEVNAME_348S                   DEVICES  CART
    RESNAME_TAPE                   DEVICES  TAPE
    RESNAME_CART                   DEVICES  CART
    DEV_1                          DEVICES  TAPE
    DEV_2                          DEVICES  CART
    DEV_O_TAPE                     DEVICES  0
    DEV_T_TAPE                     DEVICES  0
  CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH                                                   10.28.57

Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type

The fields of the Globals display screen are shown in Table 70.

Table 70 Fields of the GLOBALS Option Display Type A (All Fields)

Field

Description

<A>

Indicates the All Fields display type.

Name

Name of the Global variable.

Poolid

Name of the member that contains the Global variable.

Value

Value of the Global variable.

Commands of the Globals Display Screen

The commands of the Globals display screen are shown in Table 71.

Table 71 Commands of the GLOBALS Option Display Screen

Command

Description

SHPF

The SHPF command shows the current PFKey assignments.

REFRESH

The REFRESH command (PF04/PF16) refreshes the screen.

AUTO

The AUTO command periodically refreshes the screen automatically after a specified interval. For more information, see AutoRefresh Mode.

The OPERATOR Option

The OPERATOR option displays a submenu of preset operator commands. Upon selection of a preset command, the Operator Command screen is displayed with the results of the preset command. For more information on the Operator Command screen, see The COMMAND Option.

The SAMPLES Option

The SAMPLES option contains a series of sample automation options that demonstrate how customized automation options can be used to activate other facilities.

The SERVERS Option

The SERVERS option displays the statuses of all or selected Control-O servers. Control-O servers are started tasks that facilitate DO TSO, DO KSL, and DO SHELL requests issued by Control-O rules. For more information about Control-O servers, see Control-O Servers.

To display the status of servers, type S (Select) to the left of the SERVERS option in the Automation Options menu and press Enter. The window illustrated in Figure 60 is opened.

Figure 60 Automation Options SERVERS Option Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
  COMMAND    Enter Console Command
  CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
  ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
  GLO |                                                                    |
  OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
  SAM |                                                                    |
S SER |   SERVER ID     ===> ALL                                           |
  SUB |   SERVER TYPE   ===>                                               |
 =====|                                                                       |==
      +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
SELECT AN OPTION AND PRESS ENTER                                      11.17.06

The window contains the fields shown in Table 72:

Table 72 Fields of the SERVERS Option Window

Field

Description

SERVER ID

Name or mask of the servers whose status should be displayed. The value ALL displays the statuses of all servers, and is the default.

SERVER TYPE

Server type. Valid types are:

  • S — Special

  • G — General

  • I — Immediate

Change the defaults, if desired, and press Enter. The Server Status screen is displayed.

Server Status Screen

The Server Status screen displays the statuses of Control-O servers selected through the SERVERS option in the Automation Options facility. Two predefined display types (described below) of the Server Status screen are available. Up and down scrolling conventions are supported on the Server Status screen. To return to the Automation Options menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Changing Display Types

While in the Server Status screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Copy
DI A

displays the All Fields display type.

Valid predefined display types are:

  • D — Default display type

  • A — All Fields display type

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 61 is an example of the Default display type for the Server Status screen.

Figure 61 Server Status Display Type D (Default)

Copy
------< D >---------------  CONTROL-O SERVERS STATUS  ----------------(OA.S)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===>
    O SERVER   STCID   TYP QLN STIME - STATUS -----------------
      CICSP01           S  000 124820  DOWN
      CICST01           S  000 124820  DOWN
      IMS01             S  000 124820  DOWN
      IMS02             S      124820  DOWN
      IOA01             S  000 124820  DOWN
      GENRL01           G  000 124820  DOWN
      GENRL02           G      124820  DOWN
      GENRL03           G      124820  DOWN
      IMMED01           I      124820  DOWN
      IMMED02           I      124820  DOWN
      IMMED03           I      124820  DOWN
      IMMED04           I      124820  DOWN
      IMMED05           I      124820  DOWN
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>   NO MORE ENTRIES IN THE LIST     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
   
   
   
   
   
   
OPTIONS: S  START  P  STOP  C  CANCEL F  FORCE  T  TERMINATE          13.44.47

Fields in the Default (D) Display Type

The fields in the Default (D) display type are shown in Table 73.

Table 73 Fields of the Server Status Screen Default Display Type (D)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<D>

Indicates the Default display type.

The following information is displayed for each server in the Default display type:

O (Option)

Allows entry of line options to be applied to a particular server.

SERVER

The server name.

STCID

ID of the started task associated with the server. This field is displayed only for active servers.

TYPE

The server type. Valid values are:

  • S — Special

  • G — General

  • I — Immediate

QLN (Queue Length)

Length of the request queue associated with the server.

For Special servers, this field is displayed only for the first server associated with each of the preset environments.

Since all General servers share the same queue, QUEUE LENGTH is displayed only for the first General server.

STIME

Time of the last server status change.

SERVER STATUS

Status of the server. Valid values are:

  • DOWN — The server is not active but is started implicitly upon arrival of the first request for it.

  • STARTING— Control-O issued an operator start command for the server, which is not yet up.

  • UP — The server is up and waiting for requests to be processed.

  • TERMINATING — The server is in the process of shutdown.

  • STOPPED — The server was stopped using the STOP or FORCE command. The server will restart only when explicitly started by a START command.

  • ENDED WITH ERROR — The server has terminated because of an internal error.

The following information is displayed only for servers in EXECUTING status:

REQUEST

TSO command, KSL script, or z/OS shell script, as specified in the DO statement that is executing in the server.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Below is an example of the All Fields display type for the Server Status screen. This display type is requested by specifying the DISPLAY A command (abbreviated DI A) in the COMMAND field of the screen.

Figure 62 Server Status Screen All Fields Display Type (A)

Copy
------<A>-------------------CONTROL-O SERVERS STATUS-------------------(OA.S)
COMMAND ===>                                                  SCROLL ===> HALF
 O SERVER   STCID   TYP QLN STIME  TOUT -------------- STATUS -----------------
   CICSP01           S  000 191028       DOWN
   CICST01           S  020 191040       STOPPED
                            190125 0400  KOA: HGAJ USER 1
                            190130 0400  KOA: HGAJ USER 4
   IMS01             S  000 191136       DOWN
   IMS02             S      191102       DOWN
   GENRL01  STC11900 G  001 191134 0010  EXECUTING
                                         TSO: LISTC LVL(M24)
                            191120       TSO: LISTC LVL(M06)
   GENRL02  STC11921 G      191123 0120* EXECUTING
                                         TSO: CALL 'USER.LOADLIB(TEST1)'
   IMMED01           I      161814       DOWN
   IMMED02           I      161814       DOWN
====== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>   NO MORE ENTRIES IN THE LIST     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
   
   
   
   
   
   
OPTIONS: S  START  P  STOP  C  CANCEL F  FORCE  T  TERMINATE          19.16.32

Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type

The fields in the All Fields (A) display type are shown in Table 74.

Table 74 Fields of the Server Status Screen All FIelds Display Type (A)

Field

Description

The following general information is displayed:

<A>

Indicates the All Fields display type.

The following information is displayed for each server displayed in the All Fields display type:

O (Option)

Allows entry of line options to be applied to a particular server.

SERVER

Server name.

STCID

ID of the started task associated with the server. This field is displayed only for active servers.

TYPE

Server type. Valid values are:

  • S — Special

  • G — General

  • I — Immediate

QLN (Queue Length)

Length of the request queue associated with the server.

For Special servers, this field is displayed only for the first server associated with each of the preset environments.

Since all General servers share the same queue, QLN is displayed only for the first General server.

STIME

Time of the last server status change.

SERVER STATUS

Status of the server. Valid values are:

  • DOWN — The server is not active but is started implicitly upon arrival of the first request for it.

  • STARTING — Control-O issued an operator start command for the server, which is not yet up.

  • UP — The server is up and waiting for requests to be processed.

  • TERMINATING — The server is in the process of shutdown.

  • STOPPED — The server was stopped using the STOP or FORCE command. The server will restart only when explicitly started by a START command.

  • ENDED WITH ERROR — The server has terminated because of an internal error.

The following information is displayed only for servers in EXECUTING status:

TOUT

The TIMEOUT parameter, as specified in the executing DO statement.

When the time specified in the TIMEOUT parameter has been exceeded, an asterisk (*) is appended to the time-out value.

REQUEST

TSO command, KSL script, or z/OS shell script, as specified in the DO statement that is executing in the server.

The following information is displayed for servers which have requests queued to them:

NEXT

First (next) request in the server’s queue.

QTIME

Time the next request was queued for execution.

NEXT-2

Second (second next) request in the server’s queue.

QTIME-2

Time the second next request was queued for execution.

QUEUE TIMEOUT

Queue time-out threshold of the associated request queue. This parameter is displayed only for the first request in the server’s queue.

Options of the Server Status Screen

Table 75 describes the valid options, listed at the bottom of the screen, that can be applied to any server status line.

Table 75 Options of the Server Status Screen

Option

Description

Option

Description

START

(S) Starts the server.

CANCEL

(C) Cancels the command executing in the server.

STOP

(P) Stops the server.

FORCE

(F) Acts as both CANCEL and STOP: The executing request is canceled and the server is stopped.

TERM

(T) Stops the server, allowing it to be restarted implicitly.

The SUBSYS Option

The SUBSYS option displays status and other information about all or selected operational MVS subsystems.

Subsystems (as defined in IBM systems) are groups of routines that act as extension of the operating system. Communication with these routines is established through specialized interface services designated as the Subsystem interface.

To obtain information about subsystems, type S (Select) to the left of the SUBSYS option in the Automation Options menu. The window shown in Figure 63 is opened.

Figure 63 Automation Options SUBSYS Option Window

Copy
--------< D >--------  CONTROL-O - AUTOMATION OPTIONS  -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
 O OPTION                     DESCRIPTION
   COMMAND    Enter Console Command
   CONSOLE    Display Contents of MVS Console
   ENQ +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
   GLO |                                                                    |
   OPE |                      Please Enter Parameters                       |
   SAM |                                                                    |
   SER |   SUBSYS. NAME  ===> ALL                                           |
 S SUB |                                                                    |
===== +--------------------------------------------------------------------+===
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
SELECT AN OPTION AND PRESS ENTER                                      14.50.34

The window contains the following field:

SUBSYS. NAME — the name of the subsystem with the status to be displayed (from 1 through 4 characters). The value ALL displays the statuses of all subsystems, and is the default.

Change the default, if desired, and press Enter. The Subsystem Display screen is displayed.

Subsystems Display Screen

The Subsystems Display screen displays status and other information about the subsystems selected through the SUBSYS option in the Automation Options facility. Two predefined display types of the Subsystems Display screen are available. These are described in the following paragraphs. Up and down scrolling conventions are supported on the Subsystems Display screen. To return to the Automation Options menu, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Changing Display Types

While in the Subsystems Display screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is:

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Copy
DI A

displays the All Fields display type

Valid predefined display types are:

  • D — Default display type

  • A — All Fields display type

Display Type D (Default)

Figure 64 shows an example of the Default display type for the Subsystems Display screen.

Figure 64 Automation Options SUBSYS Option Default Display Type (D)

Copy
---------------------  CONTROL-O SUBSYSTEMS DISPLAY    -------< D >-------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     SUBSYSTEM-NAME   STATUS   SSCT-ADDRESS   SSVT-ADDRESS
        O21P          ACTIVE     00CFF4A0       00D40AD4
        JES2          ACTIVE     00D6C898       00D3E658
        MSTR          ACTIVE     00D638A8       00D63790
        SMS           ACTIVE     00D6C010       00D404C0
        BLSR          ACTIVE     00D6C870       00D63EF0
        FDR           INACT      00D6C848       00000000
        PDSM          ACTIVE     00D63678       00D6ACE8
        PLD           INACT      00D63650       00000000
        GOSM          INACT      00D63628       00000000
        IRLM          INACT      00D63750       00000000
        JRLM          INACT      00D63728       00000000
        JESD          INACT      00D63700       00000000
        JESX          INACT      00D63DC8       00000000
        JESY          INACT      00D63DA0       00000000
        NETV          ACTIVE     00D63D78       00FBC168
        CNMP          INACT      00D63D50       00000000
        TSSO          INACT      00D63D28       00000000
        GPSM          ACTIVE     00D63D00       00D8A358
        PROD          ACTIVE     00D63CD8       00D405CC
        PRD4          INACT      00D63CB0       00000000
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH, AUTO                                             15.05.54

Fields in the Default (D) Display Type

The fields in the Default (D) display type are shown in Table 76.

Table 76 Fields of the SUBSYS Option Default Display Type (D)

Field

Description

<D>

Indicates Default display type.

SUBSYSTEM

Subsystem identification (1 to 4 character string).

STATUS

Subsystem status. Valid values are:

  • ACTIVE — The subsystem status is active

  • INACT — The subsystem status is inactive

SSCT ADDRESS

Address of the Subsystems Control table.

SSVT ADDRESS

Address of the Subsystems Vector table.

Display Type A (All Fields)

Figure 65 shows an example of the All Fields display type for the Subsystems Display screen. This display type is requested by specifying the DISPLAY A command (abbreviated DI A) in the COMMAND field of the screen.

Figure 65 SUBSYS Options All FIelds Display Type (A)

Copy
--------< A >--------  CONTROL-O SUBSYSTEMS DISPLAY    -------------------(OA)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     SUBSYSTEM-NAME   STATUS   SSCT-ADDRESS   SSVT-ADDRESS
        O21P          ACTIVE     00CFF4A0      00D40AD4
        ACTIVE FUNCTIONS         07-AL   09-WT   10-CM   14-DM   16-DA
                                 17-DA   18-DA   19-DA   38-CI   39-AG
        JES2          ACTIVE     00D6C898      00D3E658
        ACTIVE FUNCTIONS         01-SO   02-CS   03-CS   04-ET   05-JS
                                 06-AL   07-AL   08-EN   09-CT   10-CM
                                 11-US   12-JT   13-RQ   16-DA   17-DA
                                 18-DA   19-DA   20-RR   21-RR   53-
                                 64-     70-     71-     75-
        MSTR          ACTIVE     00D638A8   7  00D63790
        ACTIVE FUNCTIONS         04-ET   05-JS   06-AL   08-EN   09-WT
                                 10-CM   12-JT   14-DM   15-VS   32-CF
                                 33-WT   48-     50-     63-     68-
                                 72-     73-
        SMS           ACTIVE     00D6C010      00D404C0
        ACTIVE FUNCTIONS         08-EN   15-VS   55-
CMDS: SHPF, REFRESH, AUTO                                             15.25.30

Fields in the All Fields (A) Display Type

The fields in the All Fields (A) display type are shown in Table 77.

Table 77 Fields of SUBSYS Option All Fields Display Type (A)

Field

Description

<A>

Indicates All Fields display type.

SUBSYSTEM-
NAME

Subsystem identification (1 to 4 character string).

STATUS

Subsystem status. Valid values are:

  • ACTIVE — The subsystem status is active.

  • INACT — Subsystem status is inactive.

SSCT ADDRESS

Address of the Subsystems Control table.

SSVT ADDRESS

Address of the Subsystems Vector table.

ACTIVE FUNCTIONS

Function code and SSOB extension ID. For a list of the codes and their descriptions, see the IBM manual MVS Using the Subsystem Interface.

Commands of the Subsystems Display Screen

The commands that are available in the Subsystems Display screen are shown in Table 78.

Table 78 Commands of the SUBSYS Display Screen

Command

Description

SHPF

The SHPF command shows the current PFKey assignments.

REFRESH

The REFRESH command (PF04/PF16) refreshes the screen.

AUTO

The AUTO command periodically refreshes the screen automatically after a specified interval. For more information, see AutoRefresh Mode.

KOA Recording

The KOA Recorder facility, which is available under IOA TSO and IOA cross memory, makes it easy to create KOA scripts. The KOA Recorder generates a script by automatically recording your keystrokes and saving the keystrokes in a file. This eliminates the need to write scripts manually and reduces the chance of error. You can edit the file as necessary.

Scripts generated by the KOA Recorder can be submitted in the same way as manually created scripts, that is, by using batch procedure IOARKOA.

For more information on the KOA Recorder, see to the KeyStroke Language (KSL) User Guide.

IOA Variables Database Facility

The IOA Variables Database facility, which is also available to Control-M if CMEM is installed, is composed of a series of screens that enable you to view, create and modify the types of AutoEdit variable databases shown in Table 79, as assigned by the system administrator.

Table 79 IOA Variables Databases

Database

Description

Global

Includes user-defined AutoEdit global variables that are shared by all rules, and Control-M jobs if CMEM is installed, on the same computer.

XAE global

Includes user-defined AutoEdit XAE global variables that are shared by all rules, and Control-M jobs, if CMEM is installed, over a Sysplex.

In addition to global and XAE global, user-defined AutoEdit variables can also be defined as local. Local variables are used by only one rule (or Control-M job, if CMEM is installed) running on one computer. The IOA Variable Database facility does not deal with local variables. For more information on user-defined AutoEdit variables and the XAE facility, seeAutoEdit Facility .

Certain screens and features of the IOA Variable Database facility are relevant to Control-O but not to Control-M. If CMEM is installed, and you only want to use the IOA Variable Database facility as it relates to the Control-M environment, refer to the description of the IOA Variable Database facility in the Control-M for z/OS User Guide.

All information in AutoEdit variable databases is stored in the files described in Table 80.

Table 80 AutoEdit Variable Database Files

File

Description

Variable Database Definition File

Information about each variable database.

Variable Database Column File

Information about all column names in all variable databases. The column names represent variable names to be used within the database.

Variable Database Variables File

Information about all variables in all variable databases. This file stores the actual values for the variables.

These files are managed by the IOA Access method. The number of database variables that can be defined is limited only by the size of these files. The IOA Access method is described in detail in the IOA chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

To enter the Variable Database facility, select Option IV in the IOA Primary Option menu. The IOA Variables Facility Entry Panel is displayed.

Entry Panel

The entry panel shown in Figure 66 is displayed when you specify Option IV in the IOA Primary Option menu.

Figure 66 IOA Variable Database Entry Panel

Copy
----------------------- IOA Variables - ENTRY PANEL  ----------------------(IV)
COMMAND ===>                                                                  
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
SPECIFY DATABASE NAME                                                         
                                                                              
DATABASE ===>                 (Blank for Database selection list)             
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
MODE     ===>                 (Blank or ADMIN for Administration mode)        
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
                                                                              
USE THE COMMAND "SHPF" TO SEE PFK ASSIGNMENT                           16.21.43
  • To display the list of all variable databases, press Enter. The Database List screen is displayed.

  • To enter the IOA Variables Database facility as a regular user, leave the MODE field blank. This enables you to view and update variables in the databases, but you cannot perform administrative functions (add or delete variables).

  • To enter the IOA Variables Database facility with full administrator functionality, type ADMIN in the MODE field.

  • To display the list of variables in a specific variable database, type the database name in the DATABASE field and press Enter. The Values of Database screen for the specified database is displayed. An asterisk (*) can be used as a mask character in the DATABASE field of this screen.

Control-O can have multiple variable databases; Control-M can only use the IOAVAR database.

  • To enter the IOA Variables Database facility as a regular user, leave the MODE field blank. In this case, you will be able to view the variables in the databases, but you will not be able to perform administration functions.

  • To enter the IOA Variables Database facility with full administrator functionality, type ADMIN in the MODE field.

The additional functions available in administration mode are described in the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

The List of Databases Screen

The List of Databases screen displays a list of the variable databases currently defined. This screen can be entered using the IOA Variables Facility Entry Panel or when returning from the Column List screen.

For a variable database to be loaded into memory, the database must be listed in the DAGLBLST DD statement of the Control-O monitor. For more information, see the description of Global AutoEdit variables in the Control-O chapter of the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

The List of Databases screen is shown in Figure 67.

Figure 67 List of Databases Screen

Copy
LIST OF DATABASES -----  IOA VARIABLES IN USE  -----------------------------(IV)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT NAME                  DESCRIPTION
    ACCTING               ACCOUNTING DEPT VARIABLES
    COSALLMT              COSMOS - METHODS DATABASE
    COSALLPR              COSMOS - PREREQUISITES DATABASE
    COSIMGOB              COSMOS - SYSIMAGE OBJECTS
    COSIMGSD              COSMOS - VTAM OBJECTS SOURCE
    COSIMGSR              COSMOS - VTAM OBJECTS SOURCE
    COSMOSPR              COSMOS - PREREQUISITES DATABASE
    COSSTCOB              COSMOS - STC RUNNING OBJECTS
    COSSTCSD              COSMOS - STC OBJECTS SOURCE
    INVENTRY              INVENTORY RELATED VARIABLES
    PAYROLL               PAYROLL VARIABLES
===== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>  NO MORE DATABASES  <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
OPTIONS:  V VIEW VARS                                                08.15.55

A short description is displayed for each database. This description can be specified either when creating a new database, or through the U (Update) option described in the following section.

Options of the Database List Screen

To request an option, type the option in the OPT field to the left of the database name, and press Enter. The following option is available for all users:

V (VIEW VARS) — View Variables, that is, display the variables of the database in the Values of Database screen.

Only the V option is intended for all users. The remaining options, I (Insert),
U (Update), and S (Select), are intended for INCONTROL administrators only, and are described in the INCONTROL for z/OS Administrator Guide.

The Values of Database Screen

The Values of Database screen displays all columns and variables in the current (selected) database.

The column names listed in this screen represent variable names (also known as database attributes) used in the variable database. The variables listed in the Values of Database screen represent actual variable values. Variable values are loaded into memory automatically at Control-O startup.

To enter this screen, type V (View Variables) for the database you want to view in the Database List screen. The variables in the selected database are displayed.

For a description of the screen that is displayed if you are viewing the IOAVAR database, see The Values of Database Screen for the IOAVAR Database.

Figure 68 Values of Database Screen

Copy
VALUES OF DATABASE: COSSTCSD                                             (IV.V)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     ROW       CPU       OBJECT    DESIRED   ATIPL     NOTIPL    MODE      CLASS
   
     00001000  ALL       JES2      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      BASE
     00002000  ALL       VTAM      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      COMM
     00003000  ALL       CICP      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DC
     00004000  ALL       CICT      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DC
     00005000  ALL       TCP       DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      COMM
     00006000  ALL       IDMS      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DB
     00007000  ALL       IMS       DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DB
     00008000  ALL       NETV      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      COMM
     00009000  ALL       OMON      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      IOA
     00010000  ALL       CTM       DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      IOA
     00011000  ALL       CTD       DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      IOA
     00012000  ALL       ADAB      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DB
     00013000  ALL       DB2T      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DB2
     00014000  ALL       DB2P      DOWN      UP        DOWN      FREE      DB2
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>> NO MORE ROWS FOR THIS DATABASE <<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
   
   
OPTIONS:  Z ZOOM     I INSERT   D DELETE   R REPEAT                    09.19.41

Standard up and down scrolling conventions are supported in this screen.

Use the scrolling PFKeys to scroll the variable database LEFT (PF10/PF22) and RIGHT (PF11/PF23).

Row Numbers in a Variable Database

Rows in a variable database are numbered according to the following rules:

  • Row numbers in a variable database are initially incremented by 1000.

  • When a new row is inserted, it is assigned an intermediate number incremented by 100.

  • Rows inserted between row numbers with a hundreds value are assigned numbers incremented by ten.

  • Rows inserted between row numbers with a tens value are assigned numbers incremented by one.

For example, a row inserted immediately after row 2000 is assigned a number of 2100.

A maximum of 999 rows can be inserted between two original rows in a variable database. Row numbers can be refreshed, that is, assigned new numbers incremented by 1000, in the following way:

  1. Unload the IOA Variable Database Variables file using the IOAVARUL job in the IOA JCL library. This job invokes the IOADUL utility.

  2. Reload the file using the IOAVARLD job in the IOA JCL library. This job runs the IOADLD utility with the RENUM parameter specified.

    For more information about the IOADUL and IOADLD utilities, see the INCONTROL for z/OS Utilities Guide.

The Values of Database Screen for the IOAVAR Database

If you are viewing the IOAVAR database, the display is different from the screen you normally would see for other variable databases.

To enter this screen, type V (View Variables) for the IOAVAR database in the Database List screen. The variables in the selected database are displayed, as shown in Figure 69.

Figure 69 Values of Database Screen

Copy
VALUES OF DATABASE: IOAVAR                                               (IV.V)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
 ROW       VARNAME                                 VALUE                        
                                                                                
 00022889 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_1           045673                        
 00023866 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_2           1045683                       
 00024902 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_3           045677                        
 00025863 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_4           043433                        
 00026943 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_5           045543                        
 00027792 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_6           045556                        
 00028972 %%\M\ACCTS\BCKP\PDTAPE_0001_7           045666                        
 00029831 %%\M\ACCTS\EMPLY\EMP_00123_SCHOOL       STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW YORK A
 00030765 %%\M\OPER\KPL\SPACE_TYPE_5              TRK                           
 00031985 %%\M\SYS\DBLG\NAME_OF_COMPUTER_1        A                             
 00032972 %%\M\SYS\DBLG\NAME_OF_COMPUTER_2        D                             
 00033769 %%\M\SYS\DBLG\NAME_OF_COMPUTER_3        K                             
 00034919 %%\M\SYS\DBLG\NAME_OF_COMPUTER_4        W                             
 00035955 %%\M\OPER\GRPBKP\GENERATION_NUMBER_A    001                           
 00036932 %%\M\OPER\GRPBKP\GENERATION_NUMBER_B    001                           
 00037778 %%\M\OPER\GRPBKP\GENERATION_NUMBER_C    003                           
 00038808 %%\M\OPER\GRPBKP\GENERATION_NUMBER_D    002                           
 ======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>> NO MORE ROWS FOR THIS DATABASE <<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
                                                                                
 OPTIONS:  Z ZOOM     I INSERT   D DELETE   R REPEAT                    09.19.41

Each line in the screen represents a variable in the database. Variables and their values are loaded into memory automatically at Control-O or CMEM Monitor startup.

The Values of Database screen displays the information shown in Table 81 about the variables in the IOAVAR database.

Table 81 Fields of the Values of Database Screen

Field

Description

ROW

Each variable is assigned its own row in the database. This column displays the row number of the variable.

VARNAME

The variable path and name, in the following format:

Copy
%%\M\app_name\grp_name\job_name\var_name

In this format,

  • %% is a constant that indicates that the string is a variable

  • M is a mandatory constant that indicates that the string is a Control-M variable

  • the levels in the variable path are represented by the following variables

    • app_name is optional and is the Control-M application where var_name resides, is optional and

    • grp_name is optional and is the Control-M group within app_name where var_name resides

    • job_name is optional and is the Control-M job within group_name where var_name resides

  • var_name is mandatory and is the variable name

All levels in the path within the VARNAME string are separated by \ (backslash) characters.

Up to 30 characters of VARNAME are displayed. If the value of VARNAME is longer, the full variable path and name can be viewed in the Variable Zoom screen, which is described in Variable Database Zoom Screen.

VALUE

Value of the variable. Up to 30 characters of the value are displayed. If the value of VALUE is longer, the full value can be viewed in the Variable Zoom screen, which is described in Variable Database Zoom Screen.

Standard up and down scrolling conventions are supported in this screen.

Use the scrolling PFKeys to scroll LEFT (PF10/PF22) and RIGHT (PF11/PF23) in the Values of Database screen.

Options of the Values of Database Screen

Table 82 describes the options, listed at the bottom of the Values of Database screen, that can be applied to any row in the screen. Type an option in the first (leftmost) column of the screen (first character of the row number) and press Enter.

Table 82 Options of the Values of Database Screen

Option

Description

Z (ZOOM)

Show the variables in the row in a format which displays the entire content of each variable. Variables can be edited in this display as well. For more information, see "Variable Database Zoom Screen" immediately below.

I (INSERT)

Insert a new row in the variable database.

D (DELETE)

Delete the row for which this option is specified.

R (REPEAT)

Insert a new row which is identical to the one for which this option is specified.

Variable Database Zoom Screen

The value of each variable can be up to 140 characters in length, but only the first eight characters of each variable value are displayed. The Variable Database Zoom screen enables display of the full variable value. To display the full variable value, type Z (Zoom) next to the desired row in the Display screen. The Zoom screen, shown in Figure 70, is displayed.

Figure 70 Variable Database Zoom Screen

Copy
VALUES OF DATABASE: COSALLMT ROW:  87932454                         (IV.V.Z)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
     O NAME      VALUE
     U DESIRED   UP
     U CURRENT   UNKNOWN
     U DESIRED
     U OBJDB     COSVTMOB
     U ACTCLASS
     U METCLASS
     U METHOD    COSMET13
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> NO MORE COLUMNS IN THIS ROW <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
OPTIONS:  A ADDITIONAL INFORMATION                                     08.31.07

Display Types of the Variable Database Zoom Screen

Table 83 shows the predefined display types that are available for the Variable Database Zoom screen:

Table 83 Display Types of the Variable Database Zoom Screen

Type

Description

D (Default display type)

Includes the first 64 characters of the value of each variable in the selected database row. A second line containing the remainder of the variable value (up to 76 characters) can be displayed using the A (Additional Information) option.

B (Blank Line display type)

Displays the second line for all variables, regardless of whether or not it contains additional information.

Changing Display Types

While in the Variable Database Zoom screen, the display type can be changed using the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is the identifying letter for the desired type.

DISPLAY can be abbreviated to DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S (Select) in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press PF03/PF15 (END).

Copy
DI B

displays the Blank Line display type

The Default display of the Variable Database Zoom screen includes the first 64 characters of the value of each variable in the selected database row.

Zoom Screen Option

The following option is available in the Variable Database Zoom screen:

A (Additional Information) – Display a second line for the selected variable. The second line contains the remainder (up to 76 characters) of the value of the selected variable.

To exit the Variable Database Zoom screen without implementing any changes, type CAN (cancel) in the COMMAND line and press Enter.

To enable changes to a variable database loaded in memory to be immediately accessible by Control-O rules, the modified database must be reloaded by use of the following operator command:

Copy
F CONTROLO,LOADGLOBAL=dbname

Variables in a variable database can also be updated or modified using DO SET statements in Control-O rules, or through SETOGLB statements in a KSL or KOA script. For more information, see DO SET: Automated Console Action Parameter . For more information on KSL and KOA, refer to the KeyStroke Language User Guide.

Use the following operator command to save changes made to a variable database in memory:

Copy
F CONTROLO,WRITEGLOBAL=dbname

Access to the IV screen is blocked in MODE ADMIN, due to the potential risks that can result from updating the IOAVAR physical database in a live system.

The following discussion concentrates on the IOAVAR database which is used by Control-M, but similar problems might occur with Control-O only pools.

Updating the IOAVAR physical database using screen IV in MODE ADMIN in a live system can lead to

  • variables getting lost

  • blank variable names

The following scenario can lead to variables getting lost.

The IOAVAR database can be changed in the following ways:

  • By Control-M SET operations (SET VAR in the Job Scheduling Definition, %%SET in the JCL) that change the live database in memory.

    These changes are saved in the physical database when the WRITEGLOBAL=IOAVAR command is automatically issued.

    Only a WRITEGLOBAL saves these changes to the database.

  • By manually changing the physical database via screen IV in MODE ADMIN.

    These manual changes are brought to the live database in memory by a LOADGLOBAL command.

    A LOADGLOBAL=IOAVAR is performed automatically when Control-O/CMEM starts.

    A LOADGLOBAL=IOAVAR can be issued manually when changes that are made to the physical database must be brought into the live database in memory while the system is active.

    A LOADGLOBAL=IOAVAR replaces the entire existing copy of the database in memory.

It is hazardous to update the IOAVAR physical database using screen IV in MODE ADMIN in a live system and issue a LOADGLOBAL because in a live system an IOAVAR variable might be updated at any time and if the LOADGLOBAL is issued just before the WRITEGLOBAL is issued, it will cause recent changes that have not yet been saved with the WRITEGLOBAL to be wiped out.

The following scenario can lead to blank variable names:

When a variable is deleted from the database via IV screen in MODE ADMIN in a live system, and until a LOADGLOBAL=IOAVAR is issued, the variable remains in memory. If the deleted variable is added or updated by Control-M before the LOADGLOBAL=IOAVAR is issued, the variable will still be found in memory, and only the VALUE of the variable will be updated. The WRITEGLOBAL=IOAVAR writes only the value of changed or updated variables to the database (even if the value has not actually changed).

The end result will be that the physical database will include only the VALUE of the IOAVAR variable which has been deleted and updated but without its VARNAME which has been deleted. When viewed in IV screen in MODE ADMIN, blanks will appear in the VARNAME field.

Uppercasing and lowercasing of variables’ values

While in the Variable Database Zoom Screen, uppercase or lowercase mode can be set using the CAPS command. Format of the command is:

Copy
CAPS [{ON | OFF}]

In this command:

  • CAPS ON – Forces all user entries to be saved and displayed in uppercase characters, regardless of the case in which they were entered. Default.

  • CAPS OFF – Enables certain user entries to be saved and displayed in lowercase characters.

  • CAPS – Indicates whether CAPS ON or CAPS OFF mode is active.

Name of variables do not support lowercase characters.

Condition and Resource Handling Facility

Options 4 and 7 in the IOA Primary Option menu are directly related to the handling of IOA conditions and Control-M resources. The screens displayed by these options are discussed on the following pages.

IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

The IOA Conditions/Resources screen, which is shown in Figure 71, is accessed through Option 4 of the IOA Primary Option menu. It displays information from the IOA Conditions file, which contains the list of all existing prerequisite conditions, and the Control-M Resources file, which contains the list of Quantitative resources and Control resources. The IOA Conditions/Resources screen enables the user to

  • view IOA prerequisite conditions

  • view Control-M Quantitative resources

  • add or delete prerequisite conditions or resources (or both conditions and resources)

  • change the available quantity of Control-M Quantitative resources

For a description of prerequisite conditions, see Prerequisite Condition Concepts.

Prior to version 6.0.00 a single file, the IOA Conditions/Resources file, contained all IOA conditions and all Control and Quantitative resources. As of version 6.0.00, the IOA Conditions/Resources file has been replaced by the following two files:

  • the IOA Conditions file, containing all IOA conditions

  • the Control-M Resources file, containing all Control and Quantitative resources

To enter the IOA Conditions/Resources screen, select Option 4 on the IOA Primary Option menu. Figure 71 shows the screen that is displayed.

Figure 71 IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

Copy
-------------------------- IOA CONDITIONS/RESOURCES ------------------------(4)
COMMAND ===>                                                   SCROLL ===> CRSR
PREFIX  ===>                COND Y CONTROL Y RES Y STAT Y      DATE 0606 - 0606
OPT TYPE      CONDITION/RESOURCE    IOAID  USE QUANTITY  MAX  *P   RBA    DATE
    CONTROL   CONTROLM               01     E                    (00000)   
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                         B    0003    0003              
    RESOURCE  CPU1                          B    0098    0100              
    RESOURCE  CPU2                          B    0197    0200              
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                  01     U    0002            (00091)   
    RESOURCE  CPU1                   01     U    0002            (00091)   
    RESOURCE  CPU2                   01     U    0003            (00092)   
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                  01     R    0002          1 (00093)   
    COND      BR-BRIVPCC-ENDED-OK                                         0909
    COND      BR-BRCC0001-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      BR-BRCC0002-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      BR-BRCC0003-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      BR-BRCCIND-ENDED-OK                                         0909
    COND      BR-BRUPDT02-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      BR-BRREP001-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      BR-BRREP002-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      GL-GLINP001-ENDED-OK                                        0909
    COND      EBD-APPL-STARTED                                            0909
    COND      CICS-PROD-IS-UP                                             STAT
OPTIONS:  D DELETE  C CHANGE             COMMANDS: ADD                 14.07.08

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu press PF03/PF15 (END).

Fields of the IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

Table 84 shows the information displayed in each screen line.

Table 84 Fields of the IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

Field

Description

OPT

Option to be activated on the condition or resource.

TYPE

Type of condition or resource. Valid values are:

  • COND — Prerequisite condition

  • CONTROL — Control resource

  • RESOURCE — Quantitative resource

    CONTROL and RESOURCE are available only at sites where Control-M is active.

CONDITION/
RESOURCE

Name of the condition or resource

DATE

Original date reference of a prerequisite condition, in the format mmdd or ddmm, depending on the site standard or the STAT value.

When Control-M is active at your site, information is displayed in the following fields:

USE

Resource usage indicator for Control or Quantitative resources. Valid values depend on the type of resource.

For Control resources, valid values are:

  • E — Resource is being used in Exclusive mode.

  • S — Resource is being used in Shared mode.

For Quantitative resources, valid values are:

  • B — Line indicates the initial definition for the resource

  • U — Line indicates an instance of resource usage

  • R — Line indicates an unfulfilled critical path request (that is, a request with an *-type priority) for the resource

QUANTITY

Quantity of a Quantitative resource. What the quantity represents depends on the value in the USE indicator, as follows:

Use

Quantity

B

Quantity available. If the maximum quantity is more than 1 but only 1 is available, 0001 is displayed in pink (on color terminals). If the maximum quantity is more than 1 but none is available, 0000 is displayed in red (on color terminals).

U

Quantity in use by the particular process.

R

Quantity requested by the particular process, but unfulfilled.

MAX

Maximum available quantity of a Quantitative resource.

*P

Priority of the job requesting a Control-M resource using *-type priority. For more information, see PRIORITY: Runtime Scheduling Parameter.

RBA

Internal Control-M ID (relative byte address) of the job currently holding a Control-M resource. An RBA value of 000000 indicates that the resource was added manually.

To determine which job is using a particular resource, specify the RBA of the resource when specifying the RBAL command in the Active Environment screen. For more information, see the RBAL command in the online facilities chapter of the Control-M for OS-390 and z/OS User Guide.

IOAID

ID of the installation that is using the particular Control or Quantitative resource. This value is significant when multiple IOA installations share the same resources.

Specifying Retrieval Criteria

The user can control the type and amount of information displayed in the screen by specifying retrieval criteria.

Table 85 IOA Conditions/Resources Retrieval Criteria

Criteria

Description

PREFIX prefix

Limits the display to conditions and resources with the specified prefix. The default value is blank (no limit).

To display only those conditions and resources containing a specific string, specify the string preceded by an * (Asterisk) character.

If *OK is specified, the following would be included in the display:

UPDATE-ENDED-OK
OK-RUN
OK

COND

Determines whether prerequisite conditions are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Display prerequisite conditions. Default.

  • N (No) — Do not display prerequisite conditions.

DATE from – to

Limits the display of prerequisite conditions to the specified date range. Valid values are:

  • from — earliest date in the date range, in mmdd or ddmm format (depending on the site standard)
    The default value is three days prior to the current date. This default can be modified in the Profile member by the INCONTROL administrator.

  • to — Latest date in the date range, in mmdd or ddmm format (depending on the site standard)
    The default value is the current date.

STAT

Determines whether or not prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT are displayed. This applies only if COND is set to Y. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Include prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT. Default.

  • N (No) — Do not include prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT.

At sites where Control-M is active, the following criteria can also be used:

CONTROL

Determines whether or not Control resources are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Display Control resources. Default.

  • N (No) — Do not display Control resources.

RES

Determines whether or not Quantitative resources are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Display Quantitative resources. Default.

  • N (No) — Do not display Quantitative resources.

Adding Conditions and Resources – The ADD Command

The ADD command adds conditions to the IOA Conditions file and adds resources to the Control-M Resources file. Type this command in the COMMAND field, and press Enter. The format of the command is:

Copy
ADD type

In this command, type is one of the following:

  • COND – Add a prerequisite condition
    Special care must be taken when adding prerequisite conditions, because added conditions can trigger job submission.

  • RESOURCE/RES – (Where Control-M is active) Add a Quantitative resource
    Only authorized personnel should add Quantitative resources.

  • CONTROLCON – (Where Control-M is active) Add a Control resource
    A Control resource entry may be added manually even if a job is holding the resource. Only authorized personnel should add Control resources.

When the ADD command is entered, an appropriate window is opened. The window shown in Figure 72 opens when ADD COND is entered.

Figure 72 IOA Conditions/Resources COND Window

Copy
-------------------------- IOA CONDITIONS/RESOURCES ------------------------(4)
COMMAN +---------------------------------------------------------+  L ===> CRSR
PREFIX |     PLEASE FILL IN COND NAME, DATE AND PRESS ENTER      |  0606 - 0606
OPT TY |                                                         |  BA    DATE
    CO |     NAME ===>                       DDMM ===>           |   00)     
    RE |                                                         |           
    RE +---------------------------------------------------------+           
    RE                                                                       
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                   01    U    0002            (00091)     
    RESOURCE  CPU1                    01    U    0002            (00091)     
    RESOURCE  CPU2                    01    U    0003            (00092)     
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                   01    R    0002          1 (00093)     
    COND      BR-BRIVPCC-ENDED-OK                                         0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0002-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0003-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCCIND-ENDED-OK                                         0606
    COND      BR-BRUPDT02-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRREP001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRREP002-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      GL-GLINP001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      EBD-APPL-STARTED                                            0606
    COND      CICS-PROD-IS-UP                                             STAT
OPTIONS:  D DELETE  C CHANGE             COMMANDS: ADD                 14.07.08

Fill in the window fields as described in Table 86 according to the specified ADD command.

Table 86 IOA Conditions/Resources ADD Command Formats

Format

Description

ADD COND

Enter the name of the prerequisite condition. The current working date is displayed as the default date. This date can be modified.

ADD RESOURCE or ADD RES

Available only where Control-M is active. Enter the name of the Quantitative resource and the quantity to be added.
Available only where Control-M is active.

ADD CONTROL or ADD CON

Enter the name of the Control resource and the control type
(E – Exclusive; S – Shared).
Available only where Control-M is active.

If a Control resource is manually added with a type of E (Exclusive), no jobs in WAIT SCHEDULE status that require this resource are submitted.

If a Control resource is manually added with a type of S (Shared), no jobs in WAIT SCHEDULE status that require exclusive access to this resource are submitted.

After filling in the window, press Enter to add the condition or resource.

If a Control resource is manually added with TYPE set to E (Exclusive), no jobs in WAIT SCHEDULE status which require this resource are submitted.

If a Control resource is manually added with TYPE set to S (Shared), no jobs in WAIT SCHEDULE status which require exclusive access to this resource are submitted.

To close the window without adding the condition or resource, press the RESET key (PF04/PF16).

Options of the IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

Table 87 shows the options that can be specified for conditions and resources by typing the option in the OPT field to the left of the resource or condition name and pressing Enter.

Table 87 Options of the IOA Conditions/Resources Screen

Option

Description

D (DELETE)

Delete a condition or resource from the list. The event is recorded in the IOA Log file.

C (CHANGE)

Change the maximum available quantity of a Quantitative resource. The event is recorded in the IOA Log file.

C (CHANGE) is available only at sites where Control-M is active.

These options are discussed in detail in the following topics.

Deleting Conditions and Resources — The DELETE Option

To delete conditions or resources, type D (Delete) in the OPT field to the left of the conditions and resources being deleted and press Enter.

A confirmation window may be displayed, depending on User profile customization.

  • By default, conditions and resources are deleted without confirmation from the user.

  • The User profile can be customized to display a confirmation window with an arrow pointing to a delete request (beginning with the first request).

Figure 73 shows the IOA Conditions and Resources DELETE Option confirmation window.

Figure 73 IOA Conditions/Resources DELETE Option Confirmation Window

Copy
-------------------------- IOA CONDITIONS/RESOURCES ------------------------(4)\
COMMAND ===>                                                   SCROLL ===> CRSR
PREFIX  ===>                COND Y CONTROL Y RES Y STAT Y      DATE 0606 - 0606
OPT TYPE      CONDITION/RESOURCE    DATE  USE QUANTITY  MAX  *P   RBA    IOAID
    COND      SALARY-PRSL01A-OK     0606
    COND      SALARY-PRSL002-OK     0606               +----------------------+
    COND      SALARY-PRSL003-OK     0606               |  CONFIRM             |
 D  COND      CBT-TAPE-ARRIVED      0606     <---------|  ASK FOR EACH ONE Y  |
 D  COND      KPL-PRKPL03-OK        0606               +----------------------+
    COND      KPL-PRKPL04-OK        0606
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> B O T T O M   O F   L I S T <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
OPTIONS:  D DELETE  C CHANGE             COMMANDS: ADD                 14.07.08

If a confirmation window is displayed, fill in the options as shown in Table 88 and press Enter:

Table 88 IOA Conditions/Resources DELETE Option Confirmation Window Options

Field

Description

CONFIRM

Whether to process the delete request. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Process the request.

  • N (No) — Cancel the request.

ASK FOR EACH ONE

This line is displayed only if more than one deletion is requested. It determines whether or not individual confirmation is required for each DELETE request. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) — Individual confirmation is required for each DELETE request. The specified CONFIRM value (Y or N) applies only to the current order or request.

  • N (No) — Individual confirmation is not required for each DELETE request. The specified CONFIRM operation is applied to all DELETE requests. If CONFIRM is Y, all DELETE requests are processed; if CONFIRM is N, no DELETE request is processed.

Changing the Quantity of a Resource — The CHANGE Option (Available only if Control-M is active)

To request a change to the maximum available quantity of a resource, type C (Change) in the OPT field to the left of the resource and press Enter. Figure 74 shows the window that is opened.

Figure 74 IOA Conditions/Resources CHANGE Option Window

Copy
-------------------------- IOA CONDITIONS/RESOURCES ------------------------(4)
COMMAN +---------------------------------------------------------+  L ===> CRSR
PREFIX |  PLEASE FILL IN QUANT RES NAME, COUNT AND PRESS ENTER   |  0606 - 0606
OPT TY |                                                         |  BA    DATE
    CO |  NAME ===> TAPEP                    COUNT ===>          |  000)     
 C  RE |                                                         |           
    RE +---------------------------------------------------------+           
    RE                                                                       
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                   01    U    0002            (00091)     
    RESOURCE  CPU1                    01    U    0002            (00091)     
    RESOURCE  CPU2                    01    U    0003            (00092)     
    RESOURCE  TAPEP                   01    R    0002          1 (00093)     
    COND      BR-BRIVPCC-ENDED-OK                                         0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0002-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCC0003-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRCCIND-ENDED-OK                                         0606
    COND      BR-BRUPDT02-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRREP001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      BR-BRREP002-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      GL-GLINP001-ENDED-OK                                        0606
    COND      EBD-APPL-STARTED                                            0606
    COND      CICS-PROD-IS-UP                                             STAT
OPTIONS: D DELETE   C CHANGE             COMMANDS: ADD                 14.07.08

The value in the NAME field in the window is protected and cannot be changed.

The COUNT parameter consists of the following values:

  • sign

  • quantity

Fill in these values, as shown in Table 89 and press Enter.

Table 89 COUNT Parameter Values

Value

Description

sign

1-character sign that indicates how the quantity value is to be used.

Valid values are:

  • + (Plus) – Add the selected quantity to the current maximum available quantity to give a new maximum available quantity.

  • - (Minus) – Subtract the selected quantity from the current maximum available quantity to give a new maximum available quantity.

  • '' (Blank) – Set the maximum available quantity to the selected quantity.

quantity

4-digit 2quantity to be used to adjust the maximum quantity of the resource according to the specified sign. Leading zeros are required.

IOA Manual Conditions Screen

The IOA Manual Conditions screen, which is shown in Figure 75, displays a list of prerequisite conditions that must be confirmed manually by operations personnel.

The list of manual conditions is created by the IOALDNRS utility, which is described in the INCONTROL for z/OS Utilities Guide. This utility is intended for use at sites where Control-M or Control-D or both are installed.

The utility scans the jobs in the Control-M Active Jobs file, and the missions in the Control-D Active Missions file, for all conditions requested in IN statements that

  • are not resolved by an OUT statement

  • are not resolved by ON PGMST or DO COND statements

  • do not exist in the IOA Conditions file

The utility automatically places the conditions conforming to these criteria into the IOA Manual Conditions file. This file is used as a checklist for manual operations that operations personnel are expected to perform.

To enter the IOA Manual Conditions screen, select Option 7 on the IOA Primary Option menu.

Figure 75 IOA Manual Conditions Screen

Copy
--------------------------- IOA MANUAL CONDITIONS --------------------------(7)
COMMAND ===>                                                   SCROLL ===> CRSR
PREFIX  ===>                 PENDING Y  ADDED Y  STAT Y        DATE 0606 - 0606
OPT TYPE      CONDITION                                 DATE  ADDED          
    COND      USR-GOT-TAX-TAPE                          0606                 
    COND      DBA-RUN-UPDATE                            0606    Y            
    COND      OP-EXTERNAL-TAPE-OK                       0606    Y            
    COND      USR-GOT-BANK-TAPE                         0606                 
    COND      OP-SHUT-THE-SYSTEM                        0606                 
    COND      DBA-START-MPMXXX                          0606                 
    COND      USR-GOT-SALARY-TAPE                       0606    Y            
    COND      OP-COMMUNICATION-DOWN                     0606                 
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> B O T T O M   O F   L I S T <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
OPTIONS: A ADD TO COND/RES LIST (SCREEN 4) E ERASE       COMMANDS: NEW 18.33.47

To exit the IOA Manual Conditions screen, press END (PF03/PF15).

Fields of the IOA Manual Conditions Screen

The information displayed on each screen line is shown in Table 90.

Table 90 Fields of the IOA Manual Conditions Screen

Field

Description

OPT

Option to be activated on the condition.

TYPE

Type of condition, meaning COND for prerequisite condition.

CONDITION

Condition name.

DATE

Date reference of prerequisite condition. The format is either mmdd or ddmm depending on the site standard, or the date value STAT.

ADDED

Indicates whether the condition has been manually added to the IOA Conditions file. Valid values are:

  • N (No) – Condition has not been added.

  • Y (Yes) – Condition has been added.

Specifying Retrieval Criteria

You can control the type and amount of information displayed in the screen by specifying the retrieval criteria shown in Table 91.

Table 91 Retrieval Criteria for the IOA Manual Conditions Screen

Criteria

Description

PREFIX prefix

Limits the display to conditions with the selected prefix. Default: Blank (no limit).

To display only those conditions containing a specific string, enter the string preceded by an * (asterisk) character.

If *OK is entered, the following conditions are included in the display:

Copy
UPDATE-ENDED-OK
OK-RUN
OK

PENDING

Determines whether conditions not yet added are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) – Display pending conditions.

  • N (No) – Do not display pending conditions.

ADDED

Determines whether added conditions are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) – Display added conditions.

  • N (No) – Do not display added conditions.

STAT

Determines whether prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT are displayed. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) – Display prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT.

  • N (No) – Do not display prerequisite conditions with a date value of STAT.

DATE fromto

Limits the display of prerequisite conditions to the selected date range. Valid values are:

  • from – Earliest date in the date range, in mmdd or ddmm format (depending on the site standard). The default value is three days before the current date.

  • to – Latest date in the date range, in mmdd or ddmm format (depending on the site standard). The default value is the current date.

Adding a New Prerequisite Condition – NEW COND Command

To add a prerequisite condition to the IOA Manual Conditions file, type NEW COND in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 76 is opened.

Figure 76 IOA Manual Conditions Screen NEW COND Window

Copy
--------------------------- IOA MANUAL CONDITIONS --------------------------(7)
COMMAN +---------------------------------------------------------+  L ===> CRSR
PREFIX |     PLEASE FILL COND NAME AND DATE AND PRESS ENTER      | 0606 - 0606
OPT TY |                                                         |           
    CO |     NAME ===>                       MMDD ===>           |           
    CO |                                                         |           
    CO +---------------------------------------------------------+           
    CO                                                                       
    COND      OP-SHUT-THE-SYSTEM                        0606                 
    COND      DBA-START-MPMXXX                          0606                 
    COND      USR-GOT-SALARY-TAPE                       0606    Y            
    COND      OP-COMMUNICATION-DOWN                     0606                 
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> B O T T O M   O F   L I S T <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
OPTIONS: A ADD TO COND/RES LIST (SCREEN 4) E ERASE       COMMANDS: NEW 18.33.47

In the NAME field of the window, type the name of the condition to be added. If the condition has a date other than the current working date, enter the date in the date field of the window, in the format DDMM or MMDD, depending on the site standard.

  • To add the condition, press Enter.

  • To close the window without adding the condition, press RESET (PF04/PF16).

Adding a new condition to the IOA Manual Conditions file does not affect the IOA Conditions file.

Options of the IOA Manual Conditions Screen

To add a condition to the IOA Conditions file, or to erase a condition from the IOA Manual Conditions file, type the appropriate option in the OPT field to the left of the condition name and press Enter. Valid options are shown in Table 92.

Table 92 Options of the IOA Manual Conditions Screen

Option

Description

A (ADD)

Add the condition to the IOA Conditions file (Screen 4), and mark it "Added" (Y) in the IOA Manual Conditions file. The event is recorded in the IOA Log file.

E (ERASE)

Erase (Delete) a condition from the IOA Manual Conditions file. This does not affect the IOA Conditions file. This option is discussed in more detail in "Erasing (Deleting) Conditions" immediately below.

Erasing (Deleting) Conditions

To erase prerequisite conditions, type E in the OPT field to the left of the condition names being erased and press Enter.

A confirmation window may be displayed, depending on user profile customization:

  • By default, conditions are deleted without confirmation from the user.

  • If, however, the user profile member has been customized accordingly, the confirmation window shown in Figure77 is displayed, with an arrow pointing to an ERASE request (beginning with the first request).

Figure 77 IOA Manual Conditions Screen ERASE Confirmation Window

Copy
--------------------------- IOA MANUAL CONDITIONS --------------------------(7)
COMMAND ===>                                                   SCROLL ===> CRSR
PREFIX  ===>                 PENDING Y  ADDED Y  STAT Y        DATE 0401 - 0701
OPT TYPE      CONDITION                                +——————————————————————+
 E  COND      USR-GOT-TAX-TAPE               <—————————|  CONFIRM     (Y/N)   |
    COND      DBA-RUN-UPDATE                           +——————————————————————+
    COND      OP-EXTERNAL-TAPE-OK                       0606    Y            
    COND      USR-GOT-BANK-TAPE                         0606                 
    COND      OP-SHUT-THE-SYSTEM                        0606                 
    COND      DBA-START-MPMXXX                          0606                 
    COND      USR-GOT-SALARY-TAPE                       0606    Y            
    COND      OP-COMMUNICATION-DOWN                     0606                 
======== >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> B O T T O M   O F   L I S T <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ========
                                                                             
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
                                                                               
OPTIONS: A ADD TO COND/RES LIST (SCREEN 4) E ERASE       COMMANDS: NEW 11.30.02

If a confirmation window is displayed, fill in the window as shown in Table 93 and press Enter:

Table 93 Fields of the IOA Manual Conditions Screen ERASE Confirmation Window

Field

Description

CONFIRM

Indicates whether to process the erase (delete) request. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) – Process the request.

  • N (No) – Cancel the request.

ASK FOR EACH ONE

This line is displayed only if more than one erase is requested. It determines whether individual confirmation is required for each erase request. Valid values are:

  • Y (Yes) – Individual confirmation is required for each erase request. The selected CONFIRM value applies only to the current order or request.

  • N (No) – Individual confirmation is not required for each erase request. The selected CONFIRM value is applied to all erase requests. If CONFIRM is set to Y, all erase requests are processed; if CONFIRM is set to N, no erase request are processed.

IOA Log Facility

The IOA Log facility places automatically generated messages, which record every significant event in the life of a job, rule, or mission, in the IOA Log file. Significant events recorded in the IOA Log file include normal processing occurrences, such as job submitted, as well as error conditions encountered during processing, such as job abends. Shout facility notifications and user remarks may also be recorded in the IOA Log file.

IOA Log Screen

Figure 78 shows the IOA Log screen, which enables you to view the information contained in the Log file. To enter the IOA Log screen, select Option 5 in the IOA Primary Option menu. Upon entry, the screen displays the most recent messages currently in the IOA Log file.

Figure 78 IOA Log Screen

Copy
FILTER:            ---------------- IOA LOG  -------------------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 060601 - 060601
DATE   TIME   ODATE  USERID   CODE    -------- M E S S A G E ------------------
060601 092144 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB CT085955 CT085955/01835 SCANNED    
060601 092144 060601 M22      SEL208I JOB CT085955 CT085955/01835 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092150 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB CT085956 CT085956/01836 SCANNED    
060601 092150 060601 M22      SEL208I JOB CT085956 CT085956/01836 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092156 060601 IVP      SPY254I JOB BRIVPCC  BRIVPCC /01843 SCANNED    
060601 092157 060601 IVP      SEL208I JOB BRIVPCC  BRIVPCC /01843 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092157 060601 DBA      CTM659I FREE OF TASK BRCC0001 ODATE 060601     
                                      PERFORMED                              
060601 092201 060601 M22      SPY281I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 START      
                                      98253.1316 STOP 98253.1316 CPU 0MIN    
                                      00.04SEC SRB 0MIN 00.00SEC 0.19        
060601 092201 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 SCANNED    
060601 092201 060601 M22      SEL206W JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 ABENDED CC 
                                      SB37 STEP STEP01                       
060601 092201 060601 M22      SEL219I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 ENDED "NOT 
                                      OK"                                    
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SEL203I JOB BRCC0001 ELIGIBLE FOR RUN          
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SUB133I JOB BRCC0001 BRCC0002/01958 SUBMITTED  
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SEL203I JOB BRCC0002 ELIGIBLE FOR RUN          
CMDS: SHOW, GROUP, CATEGORY, SHPF                                      09.43.00

To return to the IOA Primary Option menu, press END (PF03/PF15).

Fields of the IOA Log Screen

Table 94 shows the fields of the IOA Log screen.

Table 94 Fields of the IOA Log Screen

Field

Description

SHOW LIMIT ON

Identifies which selection criteria other than yes or no were entered in the IOA Log Show Screen window (USERID, MEM/MIS, JOBNAME, CATEGORY, GROUP). For more information, see Filtering the IOA Log Screen Display.

DATE

Date on which the message was issued.

TIME

Time at which the message was issued.

ODATE

Original scheduling date of the job associated with the message. The format is mmddyy, ddmmyy or yymmdd, depending on the site standard.

When the display type is set to RBA display using the DISPLAY command, the Relative Byte Address (RBA) of the message within the IOA Log file is displayed instead of the ODATE. For more information on changing the screen display, see Changing IOA Log Screen Display Types.

USERID

User ID of the job issuing the message, or user ID of the user writing to the log.

CODE

IOA message code.

MESSAGE

Text of the message. If the message is longer than the space available on the screen, the message is split and continues on the following line. Messages relating to a job have the following format:

Copy
tasktype memname jobname/jobid message

fromdate – todate

Log information displayed in the screen can be limited to a specified date range in mmddyy, ddmmyy or yymmdd format, depending on the site standard. If the DATE or the ODATE value for a message is in the range selected, the message is included in the IOA Log display. Valid values are:

  • fromdate – earliest date in the date range

  • todate – latest date in the date range

Commands of the IOA Log Screen

The commands shown in Table 95 can be entered in the COMMAND field.

Table 95 Commands of the IOA Log Screen

Command

Description

SHOW

The SHOW command activates the specified screen filter, opens the IOA Log Show Screen window, or opens the Display Filters window, depending on the format of the command. For more information on filtering the IOA Log Screen, see Filtering the IOA Log Screen Display.

Valid formats are:

  • SHOW name – activates the specified filter

  • SHOW ? – opens the Display Filters window, which lists all available filters

  • SHOW (PF02/PF14) – opens the IOA Log Show Screen window for the currently active filter, and allows editing of that filter

  • SHOW name EDIT – opens the IOA Log Show Screen window for the specified filter, and allows editing of that filter

The reserved filter name DEFAULT can be used to activate or edit the default filter for the status screen. For example, SHOW DEFAULT EDIT opens the IOA Log Show Screen window for the default filter.

Only jobs conforming to the selection criteria specified in the filter are displayed in the IOA Log screen. For more information, see Filtering the IOA Log Screen Display

GROUP

The GROUP Command alternately displays or hides the GROUP name (if any) that is associated with the relevant job, mission or rule definition. When displayed, the name of the group appears after the job, mission or rule status.

CATEGORY

The CATEGORY command, which is only available at sites where Control-M is active, alternately displays and hides the CATEGORY of the relevant Control-D mission. This command applies to Control-D generated messages only. When displayed, the name of the category appears after the mission status.

Changing IOA Log Screen Display Types

While in the IOA Log screen, the display type can be changed through the DISPLAY command. The format of the command is:

Copy
DISPLAY x

In this command, x is a 1-character code that identifies the desired display type. DISPLAY can be abbreviated DI.

For a list of display types, enter DISPLAY ? to show the Display Options window. To select a display type in the window, type S in the Option field next to the ID. To exit the window without selecting a display type, press the END key (PF03/PF15).

Copy
DI B

displays the No Reverse display

Valid predefined displays are shown in Table 96.

Table 96 IOA Log Screen Predefined Display Types

Display

Description

A

Show RBA (Relative Byte Address) display (displays the RBA of the message within the IOA Log file in place of the ODATE)

D

Default display

B

No Reverse display (display is in No Reverse mode)

Filtering the IOA Log Screen Display

Screen filters can be used to filter the IOA Log screen display.

A filter consists of a set of record selection criteria (selection fields and their values). Only records that conform to the selection criteria specified in the filter are displayed on the screen.

The INCONTROL administrator can predefine filters and place them in the General profile.

Each user can activate an existing filter in the IOA Log screen by entering the SHOW command in the COMMAND line of the IOA Log screen.

Each user can define multiple filters for the screen, through the IOA Log Show Screen window, which is described in "Fields of the IOA Log Show Screen Window" in IOA Log Show Screen Window. User-defined filters belong to, are assigned names by, and can only be activated by, the user who defined them. They are stored in the user profile.

You can see the list of all available filters by opening the Display Filters window.

A predefined default filter (DEFAULT) is defined for the IOA Log screen. Site-defined defaults determine whether the last filter used or the DEFAULT filter is activated upon reentry to the IOA Log screen.

Activating an existing filter in the IOA Log screen

The SHOW command can be used to activate an existing filter when you know the name of the filter.

  • To activate an existing filter in the IOA Log screen, enter the SHOW command in the COMMAND field, as follows:

    SHOW name

    In this command, name is the name of the filter to be activated.

  • To activate the DEFAULT filter, use DEFAULT as the name of the filter.

Display Filters Window

When you do not know the name of a filter, you can still activate a filter from the list of available filters by opening the Display Filters window. This window displays the list of all available filters. These include Global filters that are available to all users, as well as user-defined filters that are only available to the individual user. You can activate a filter from the Display Filters window, or switch to the IOA Log Show Screen window, where you can edit or define a filter.

To enter the Display Filters window, type SHOW ? in the COMMAND field of the IOA Log screen and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure 79 opens.

Figure 79 IOA Log Screen Display Filters Window

Copy
FILTER:            ---------------- IOA LOG  -------------------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
SHOW LIMIT ON ==>                                          DATE 060601 - 060601
DATE   TIME   ODATE  USERID   CODE    -------- M E S S A G E ------------------
060601 092144 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB CT085955 CT085955/01835 SCANNED    
060601 092144 060601 M22      SEL208I JOB CT085955 CT085955/01835 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092150 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB CT085956 CT085956/01836 SCANNED    
060601 092150 060601 M22      SEL208I JOB CT085956 CT085956/01836 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092156 060601 IVP      SPY254I JOB BRIVPCC  BRIVPCC /01843 SCANNED    
060601 092157 060601 IVP      SEL208I JOB BRIVPCC  BRIVPCC /01843 ENDED "OK" 
060601 092157 060601 DBA      CTM659I FREE OF TASK BRCC0001 ODATE 060601     
                                      PERFORMED                              
060601 092201 060601 M22      SPY281I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 START      
                                      98253.1316 STOP 98253.1316 CPU 0MIN    
                                      00.04SEC SRB 0MIN 00.00SEC 0.19        
060601 092201 060601 M22      SPY254I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 SCANNED    
060601 092201 060601 M22      SEL206W JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 ABENDED CC 
                                      SB37 STEP STEP01                       
060601 092201 060601 M22      SEL219I JOB INTR0004 INTR0004/04371 ENDED "NOT 
                                      OK"                                    
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SEL203I JOB BRCC0001 ELIGIBLE FOR RUN          
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SUB133I JOB BRCC0001 BRCC0002/01958 SUBMITTED  
060601 092208 060601 IVP      SEL203I JOB BRCC0002 ELIGIBLE FOR RUN          
CMDS: SHOW, GROUP, CATEGORY, SHPF                                      09.43.00

Fields of Display Filters Window

The Display Filters window contains the fields shown in Table 97.

Table 97 Fields of the Display Filters Window

Field

Description

NAME

Name of the filter as it appears in the General or user profile.

DESCRIPTION

Description of the filter.

Options of the Display Filters Window

Table 98 shows the options available in the Display Filters window. To request one of these options, type the option in the OPT field to the left of the filter name and press Enter.

Table 98 Options of the Display Filters Window

Option

Description

S (SELECT)

Filters the entries that are displayed in the Automation Log Screen according to the criteria specified in the selected filter.

E (EDIT)

Opens the IOA Log Show Screen window, where the filter criteria are displayed. You can modify the filter criteria.

IOA Log Show Screen Window

The IOA Log Show Screen window in the IOA Log screen enables you to create or modify a filter.

  • To open an existing filter for editing, enter the following command:

    Copy
    SHOW filtername EDIT

    where filtername is the name of the filter to be displayed in the IOA Log Show Screen window.

  • To edit the currently active filter, it is not necessary to enter the name of the filter or the EDIT keyword. Enter the SHOW command in the COMMAND field, or press PF02/PF14. The IOA Log Show Screen window shown in Figure80 is displayed.

Figure 80 IOA Log Show Screen Window

Copy
FILTER:        +-------------------- IOA LOG SHOW SCREEN -------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>   |  FILTER            SAVE   (Y/N)  DESC:                       |
DATE   TIME    |                                                              |
060600 21354   |                                                              |
               |  CO+CMEM: GENERAL  SHOUT JOBS    GENERAL W PIPE W JOB W      |
060600 22040   |             Y        Y    Y                                  |
060600 22040   |                                                              |
060600 22040   |                                                              |
               |                                                              |
060600 22040   |                                                              |
060600 22040   |                                                              |
060600 22040   |  CODE                                                        |
               |  URGENCY:      REGULAR Y   URGENT Y   VERY-URGENT Y          |
060600 23034   |                                                              |
060600 23040   |                                                              |
060600 23040   |                                                              |
060600 23040   |                                                              |
               |  USERID       N54A                                           |
060600 23040   |  MEM/MIS      MIGDASD                                        |
060600 23040   |  JOBNAME                                                     |
060600 23040   |  CATEGORY                                                    |
               |  GROUP                                                       |
               |  ORDERID                                                     |
CMDS: SHOW,    +--------------------------------------------------------------+
  • To create a new filter, open any existing filter and enter a new name and description in the FILTER and DESC fields, as described in the following topic, "Fields of the IOA Log Show Screen Window".

Fields of the IOA Log Show Screen Window

Table 99 shows the fields contained in the IOA Log Show Screen window.

Table 99 Fields of the IOA Log Show Screen Window

Field

Description

FILTER

User-assigned name of the filter. The name specified in the FILTER field can be modified.

If changes to a filter have not been saved, an asterisk is displayed to the right of the filter name. For more information, see Closing the IOA Log Show Screen Window

SAVE (Y/N)

Whether to save modifications to the filter upon closing the window.

DESC

User-defined description of the filter. The description entered here appears next to the name in the Displaying Filters window.

The INCONTROL administrator can limit which installed INCONTROL products and options each user may access. However, because all INCONTROL products and the messages they issue are integrated, it may be important for users to see the messages of products and options to which they have no access. Therefore, the types of messages for all INCONTROL products are listed in the IOA Log Show Screen window, and by default, the messages of all installed products are listed in the IOA Log screen.

Fields that define the selection criteria to be applied to the screen are described in Table 100. Fill in the selection criteria as necessary.

The selection criteria marked with the symbol P act on a prefix basis. For example, specifying D4 in the USERID field causes the retrieval of all user IDs that start with D4.

Table 100 IOA Log Show Screen Window Selection Criteria

Criteria

Description

CO message type

To limit the type of log messages displayed, type Y (Yes) or N (No) under the desired message type. The available types are:

  • GENERAL – general messages about Control-O operations

  • SHOUT – messages issued by Control-O rules through a DO SHOUT statement

  • JOBS – error message during the execution of a rule

USERIDP

Show only messages of the specified user IDs. Up to five different user IDs can be specified.

The MEM/MIS, JOBNAME, and GROUP selection criteria only affect the display of messages related to a job. Messages not related to a job are not affected by these selection criteria, and they are displayed unless suppressed by other selection criteria.

MEM/MISP

Limit displayed Control-M job messages to the specified member names. Up to five different member names can be specified. Messages not related to a job are not affected by this show limit.

JOBNAMEP

Limit displayed job messages to the specified job names. Up to five different job names can be specified. Messages not related to a job are not affected by this show limit.

CATEGORY

Control-D category. This selection field is not relevant to Control-O and does not filter Control-O records in the IOA Log file.

GROUPP

Limit displayed job messages to the specified groups. Up to four different groups can be specified. Messages not related to a job are not affected by this show limit.

ORDERID

Limit displayed job messages  to the specified order ID

IOA Log Show Screen window (at Sites Where Multiple IOA Products Are Active)

The IOA Log Show Screen window displays different selection criteria depending on which INCONTROL products are operational at your site.

The IOA Log Show Screen window at sites where all INCONTROL products are active is illustrated in Figure 81.

Figure 81 IOA Log Show Screen Window at Sites where Multiple INCONTROL Products are Active

Copy
FILTER: DEFA   +-------------------- IOA LOG SHOW SCREEN -------------------(5)
COMMAND ===>   |  FILTER            SAVE   (Y/N)                              |
SHOW LIMIT O   |  CM     : D JOB M JOB   SHOUT USER GENERAL D INT M INT STAT  |
DATE   TIME    |             Y    Y        Y     Y     Y      N     N    N    |
060800 21354   |  CO+CMEM: GENERAL  SHOUT JOBS      GENERAL W PIPE W JOB W    |
               |             Y        Y    Y                                  |
060601 22040   |  CD+CV  : SBSYS REP MIS SHOUT USER GENERAL DAILY MONIT STAT  |
060601 22040   |             Y    Y   Y    Y     Y     Y      N     N    N    |
060601 22040   |  CB     : RUNTIME SHOUT DAILY GENERAL STATISTICS             |
               |             Y       Y     Y      Y        Y                  |
060601 22040   |  CT     : GENERAL SHOUT      REAL-TIME UTILITIES             |
060601 22040   |             Y       Y            Y        Y                  |
060601 22040   |  CODE                                                        |
               |  URGENCY:      REGULAR Y   URGENT Y   VERY-URGENT Y          |
060601 23034   |  TASK TYPE CM: JOB CYC EMR STC CST EST ECJ ECS WRN TBL TBC   |
060601 23040   |                 Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y   Y    |
060601 23040   |            CD: REP PRT BKP/MIG RST EMR NOEMR CYC NOCYC       |
060601 23040   |                 Y   Y     Y     Y   Y    Y    Y    Y         |
               |  USERID        N54A                                          |
060601 23040   |  MEM/MIS       MIGDASD                                       |
060601 23040   |  JOBNAME                                                     |
060601 23040   |  CATEGORY                                                    |
               |  GROUP                                                       |
               |  ORDERID                                                     |
CMDS: SHOW,    +--------------------------------------------------------------+

The Control-O selection criteria are described in Table 100 in IOA Log Show Screen Window. For descriptions of the selection options for other INCONTROL products, see the user guides of the respective products.

The INCONTROL administrator can limit which installed INCONTROL products and options each user can access. However, because all INCONTROL products and the messages they issue are integrated, it may be important for users to see the messages of products and options to which they have no access. Therefore, the types of messages for all INCONTROL products are listed in the IOA Log Show Screen window, and by default, the messages of all installed products are listed in the IOA Log screen.

Closing the IOA Log Show Screen Window

You can activate an edited filter with or without saving changes, depending on the value you type in the SAVE field, as follows:

  • To activate and save the filter, type Y (Yes) in the SAVE field. Changes to the filter are permanently saved.

  • To activate the filter without saving it, type N (No) in the SAVE field. Changes are kept in memory only, but are not saved.

After entering a value in the SAVE field, press one of the keys described in Table 101.

Table 101 IOA Log Show Screen window - Closing Values

Key

Description

Enter

Filtering begins with the first message currently displayed in the screen and continues downward.

PF07 (UP)

Filtering begins with the first message in the IOA Log file and continues downward.

PF08 (DOWN)

Filtering begins with the last message in the IOA Log file and continues upward.

The window is closed and the filter is activated as defined or modified.

To cancel changes made in the IOA Log Show Screen window, press RESET (PF10/PF22). The changes are canceled regardless of the value entered in the SAVE field, the window is closed, and the filter that was previously in effect is restored.

By default, pressing END (PF03/PF15) in the window works like pressing Enter. However, the default can be modified so that pressing END works like pressing RESET.

IOA Calendar Facility

The IOA Calendar facility enables you to create, view, or modify calendar definitions.

Calendars simplify the scheduling of INCONTROL product jobs, missions, rules, and so on. When a particular schedule is used in many job scheduling, mission, or rule definitions, a calendar can be defined for that schedule, and the name of that calendar can be specified in all the job, mission, or rule definitions that use that particular schedule.

For example, calendars may be defined to handle the normal scheduling needs for workdays, holidays, weekends, beginning of month, end of month, and so on. Exception calendars may also be created.

A calendar definition consists of parameters that specify when scheduling occurs.

Calendar definitions are stored in members. A member usually contains multiple calendar definitions, as follows:

  • A member contains the calendars required for a specific type of scheduling need. For example, the WORKDAYS calendar member may contain the calendar definitions for normal workday scheduling.

  • Each calendar definition in that member defines the schedule for a given year. For example, the WORKDAYS calendar member may contain calendar definitions 2001, 2002, and 2003. Each of those definitions contains the normal workday schedule for the corresponding year.

The IOA Calendar facility also enables the definition of varied work periods throughout the year, in special calendars called periodic calendars.

A calendar definition needs to be created only once. Once defined, the definition is saved and used as necessary for scheduling. Calendar definitions can be modified or deleted as required.

Any number of calendar members can be defined. Calendar members are stored in calendar libraries (partitioned data sets). Generally one calendar library is defined at time of installation, and referenced by the DACAL DD statement.

The IOA Calendar facility does not support members that have been compressed using the ISPF PACK option.

Accessing the IOA Calendar Facility

The IOA Calendar facility contains the screens described in Table 102.

Table 102 IOA Calendar Facility Screens

Screen

Description

IOA Calendar Facility entry panel

Enables specification of parameters that determine which records are displayed in subsequent screens.

Calendar List screen

Displays the list of calendar members in the selected calendar library.

Year List screen

Displays the list of years for which there is a calendar definition in the selected calendar member.

Calendar Definition screen

Displays the parameters of the selected calendar for the selected year. This is the main screen of the facility.

To enter the Calendar facility, select Option 8 in the IOA Primary Option menu. The Calendar facility entry panel is displayed.

Depending on the values entered in the entry panel, you can bypass the Calendar List screen, or the Year List screen, or both.

Entry Panel

Figure 82 shows the entry panel that is displayed on entering the IOA Calendar facility by means of Option 8 in the IOA Primary Option menu.

Figure 82 IOA Calendar Facility – Entry Panel

Copy
--------------------- IOA CALENDAR FACILITY - ENTRY PANEL ------------------(8)
COMMAND ===>                                                                
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
SPECIFY LIBRARY, CALENDAR, YEAR                                             
                                                                            
   LIBRARY  ===> IOA.PROD.CAL                                               
   CALENDAR ===>                 (Blank for calendar selection list)        
   YEAR     ===>                 (Blank for year selection list)            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
USE THE COMMAND "SHPF" TO SEE PFK ASSIGNMENT                           10.58.42

Fields of the Entry Panel

Fill in the fields shown in Table 103 and press Enter.

Table 103 Fields of the IOA Calendar Facility Entry Panel

Field

Description

LIBRARY

Name of the desired calendar library. Mandatory.

If you make an entry in this field without filling in the CALENDAR field, the list of calendars in the selected library is displayed in the Calendar List screen.

If you make an entry in this field, you can restrict the list of calendars that are displayed by entering in the CALENDAR field part of a Calendar name together with a mask character or characters (? and *).

CALENDAR

Name of the desired calendar member. Optional.

If an entry is made in this field without filling in the YEAR field, the list of years in the selected calendar member is displayed in the Year List screen.

YEAR

Year of the desired calendar definition. Optional.

This field can be used only if a CALENDAR value is also entered. If specified, the calendar definition is displayed in the Calendar Definition screen.

If you use the selection list fields, their values are not erased until you exit the entry panel by pressing END (PF03/PF15).

Calendar List Screen

The Calendar List screen displays a list of calendars (members) in the selected library. This screen can be entered directly from the entry panel or upon exiting the Year List screen.

By default, only calendar names are listed in the screen. However, if the default has been modified at time of installation, statistical information is displayed for each calendar name, as shown in Figure 83.

Figure 83 Calendar List Screen

Copy
CALENDARS IN LIB IOA.PROD.CAL                                 ------------(8.D)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  NAME ------------ VV.MM  CREATED     CHANGED     SIZE  INIT   MOD   ID  
     BANKDAYS          01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50   104   104     0 IOAPROD
     DAYSOFF           01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50    30    30     0 IOAPROD
     HOLIDAYS          01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50    15    15     0 IOAPROD
     PERIOD1O          01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50    45    45     0 IOAPROD
     SACAYCLN          01.01 02/01/28 01/11/29 17:43    26    26     0 L3051 
     SPMONCLN          01.01 02/01/29 01/11/30 15:00   117   104     0 M16A  
     SPWEKCLN          01.01 02/01/29 01/11/30 15:10   117   104     0 M16A  
     STOCKDAY          01.00 02/01/30 01/06/31 09:50    45    45     0 IOAPROD
     WORKDAYS          01.01 02/01/30 01/11/31 17:43    26    26     0 L3051 
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>  NO MORE CALENDARS IN LIBRARY  <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
OPTIONS:  S SELECT   B BROWSE   D DELETE                               13.54.14

To return to the entry panel, press END (PF03/PF15).

Options of the Calendar List Screen

To request one of the options shown in Table 104, type the option in the OPT field to the left of the calendar names, and press Enter.

Table 104 Options of the Calendar List Screen

Option

Description

S (SELECT)

Display the list of years for the calendar for any purpose, including editing or modification. Only one calendar can be selected at a time.

B (BROWSE)

Display the list of years for the calendar for browsing. Only one calendar can be selected at a time.

D (DELETE)

Delete the calendar (member) from the library. Multiple calendars can be selected.

Year List Screen

Figure 84 shows the Year List screen, which displays the list of years for which a specified calendar is defined. This screen can be entered directly through the entry panel or the Calendar List screen, or upon returning from the Year Definition screen.

If the S (Select) option was entered in the Calendar List screen for a calendar that is currently in use (selected) by another user, either the Year List screen is not displayed and the Calendar List screen remains displayed (the default), or the Year list screen is displayed in Browse mode (if a user profile definition overrides the default). In either case, an appropriate message is displayed.

If a calendar description was defined in the Calendar Definition screen, the definition is displayed to the right of the year.

Figure 84 Year List Screen

Copy
LIST OF YEARS IN IOA.PROD.CAL                                 CALENDAR WORKDAYS
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  YEAR ------------------ DESCRIPTION --------------------------------------
     2001           REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2001                             
     2002           REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2002                             
     2003           REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2003                             
     2004           REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2004                             
     2005           REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2005                             
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>  NO MORE YEARS IN CALENDAR     <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
OPTIONS: S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT  W INSERT BY WEEK DAYS  C COPY 08.52.54

To return to the Calendar List screen press END (PF03/PF15).

Format of the Year List Screen

Next to each year in the Year list, certain information can be displayed. The type and format of this information depends on whether the screen is displayed in DESC format or in STAT format, as follows:

  • In DESC format, the description of the year, taken from the DESC field of the calendar definition, is displayed. Default.

  • In STAT format, the ISPF statistical information for the calendar definition is displayed.

To change formats, use the DESC or STAT commands, described in Table 105.

Commands of the Year List Screen

Table 105 shows the commands that can be entered in the COMMAND field of the Year List screen.

Table 105 Commands of the Year List Screen

Command

Description

DESC

The DESC command displays the calendar description next to the year. The description is taken from the DESCRIPTION field in the calendar definition.

STAT

The STAT command displays the following ISPF-like statistical information about the calendar next to the year:

  • version and modification numbers

  • creation date

  • last modification date

  • user ID

Options of the Year List Screen

To request one of the options shown in Table 106, type the option in the OPT field to the left of the year and press Enter.

If the Year List screen is displayed in Browse mode, the D (Delete), I (Insert), and W (Insert By Week Days) options are not available.

Table 106 Options of the Year List Screen

Option

Description

S (SELECT)

Display the calendar definition for the specific year.

Parameters can be edited and updated only if the Calendar Definition screen is not displayed in Browse mode. If the Calendar Definition screen is displayed in Browse mode, the screen can only be browsed and parameters cannot be modified.

D (DELETE)

Delete the calendar definition for the specified year.

I (INSERT)

Insert a new year in the Year List screen and display the Calendar Definition screen with a predefined year definition for editing. The predefined calendar definition is defined with the same dates as the year next to which the I (Insert) request was specified. For more information, see "Inserting a New Year"below.

W (INSERT BY WEEK DAYS)

Insert a new year in the Year List screen and display the Calendar Definition screen for editing a predefined year definition. The predefined year definition is defined with the same days of the week as the year next to which the W (Insert by Week Days) request was specified. For more information, see "Inserting a New Year" immediately below.

C (COPY)

Copy the year to another calendar, as described in Copying Years to Another Calendar. Multiple years can be selected.

Inserting a New Year

All calendar definitions identified in the same Year List usually have the same fixed scheduling pattern. Often, this scheduling pattern is based either on dates within a month or on days of the week within the month. For example:

  • A QUARTERLY calendar might always indicate scheduling for the last day of March, June, September and December, that is, a scheduling pattern based on dates.

  • A WEEKEND calendar might always indicate scheduling all Saturdays and Sundays in each month, that is, a scheduling pattern based on days of the week.

This scheduling pattern also applies to new calendar definitions resulting from the insertion of a new year in the Year List screen.

When a year is inserted in the Year List, the IOA Calendar facility automatically generates a predefined calendar definition for the new year, based on the scheduling pattern of the calendar by which the insert request was specified. This frees the user from having to manually define the new calendar. This automatically generated calendar definition can be displayed and modified.

The Year list must be kept in ascending order without missing years, for example, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005. Each new year must be added at the end of the list.

In calendar definitions, a defined scheduling date is described by both the date (month and day) and the day of the week. Because a particular date falls on a different day of the week in different years, it is necessary to indicate whether the scheduling pattern is based on the date or on the days of the week. This is indicated by the specified insert option.

  • To define the calendar with the same scheduling dates (although corresponding days of the week may vary, for example, the QUARTERLY calendar described above), type I (INSERT).

  • To define the calendar so that scheduling takes place on the same weekdays as in the previous calendar (although the corresponding dates may vary, for example, calendar WEEKEND described above), type W (INSERT BY WEEK DAYS).

  • If the scheduling pattern is mixed, for example, if the HOLIDAYS calendar always indicates scheduling on both January 1 and the first Monday in September, specify the more appropriate option and correct the new calendar definition manually.

Copying Years to Another Calendar

Years currently displayed in the Year List screen can be copied to another calendar. To copy the desired years, type C (COPY) next to each desired year in the screen and press Enter. The window shown in Figure 85 is displayed:

Figure 85 Calendar List Screen Copy Window

Copy
LIST OF YEARS IN: IOA.PROD.CAL                                CALENDAR: CALEN1
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  YEAR -------- DESCRIPTION ------------------------------------------------
     2001          REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2001                             
 C   2002          REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2002                             
     2003          REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2003                             
     2004          REGULAR WORKING DAYS IN 2004                             
              +-----------------------------------------------------------+ 
              |                                                           | 
              |   SPECIFY DESTINATION LIBRARY,CALENDAR AND RULE NAME      | 
              |                                                           | 
              |  LIBRARY :  IOA.PROD.CAL                                  | 
              |  CALENDAR:                                                | 
              |  YEAR    :  2005                                          | 
              |                                                           | 
              |  PRESS END/RESET TO CANCEL     ENTER TO PERFORM THE COPY  | 
              +-----------------------------------------------------------+ 
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
                                                                            
OPTIONS: S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT  W INSERT BY WEEK DAYS  C COPY 15.37.39

Table 107 shows the fields contained in this window. Some fields contain default values that can be modified.

Table 107 Fields of the Calendar List Screen Copy Window

Field

Description

LIBRARY

Library containing the calendar into which the years must be copied. Must be an existing library. The default is the current library.

CALENDAR

Name of the calendar into which the year must be copied.

A year can only be copied to another calendar. It cannot be copied to its own calendar, even if the year is renamed.

If the selected calendar does not exist in the Calendar List, the calendar is created when the request is performed.

YEAR

Name of the year to be copied. If multiple years are selected, the window is initially displayed with the first selected year. As each request is performed or canceled, the next requested year name appears.

  • To perform a request, press Enter.

  • To cancel a request, press END (PF03/PF15) or RESET (PF04/PF16).

Calendar Definition Screen

Figure 86 shows the Calendar Definition screen, which is used to define, display and modify dates in a calendar for a specific year. This screen can be entered directly from the entry panel or from the Year List screen.

Figure 86 Calendar Definition Screen

Copy
--------------------------- IOA CALENDAR - WEEKDAYS ----------------------(8.Y)
COMMAND ===>                                                    SCROLL===> CRSR
YEAR 2002        REGULAR WORKDAYS IN 2002                                    
                                                                             
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
         1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1       
01         Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y       
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
               1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8       
02             Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y       
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
               1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 
03             Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
       1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +           
04     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y           
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
           1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1     
05         Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
                 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 
06                   Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     Y Y Y Y Y     
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S---
TYPE  Y  IN ALL THE EXECUTION DAYS                                     14.37.10

Fields of the Calendar Definition Screen

Table 108 shows the fields of the Calendar Definition screen.

Table 108 Fields of the Calendar Definition Screen

Field

Description

YEAR

Year of the calendar. This value can be modified. When modified, the values indicated for each date in each month (described below) are shifted to the appropriate day of the week.

Description

User-supplied, free text description of the calendar. Optional.

Month and dates

Each month of the year (01 through 12) of the calendar consists of the following:

  • Separator line.
    Sunday (or Saturday, according to the default at your site) is marked "S".

  • Month label (01 through 12)

  • Date label for the day of the month

  • Updatable field for defining execution dates
    Valid values are:

    • Y (Yes) – Select the rule on that date.

    • N (No) or '' (Blank) – Do not select the rule for execution on that date.

    • + For a relative calendar, select the closest next "date."

    • - For a relative calendar, select the closest previous "date."

A relative calendar is a calendar used in a formula to create other calendars. It cannot be specified in a DCAL, WCAL, or CONFCAL field. For details, see the description of the IOABLCAL utility in the INCONTROL for z/OS Utilities Guide.

Periodic Calendars

Some rules must be scheduled periodically, according to schedules that are not easily expressed in terms of fixed days and dates within months. In these cases, monthly, or even yearly, scheduling definition is awkward.

For example:

  • A payroll rule needs to be scheduled every other Wednesday.

  • In some months, the rule may be scheduled on the first, third, and even fifth Wednesday in the month. In other months, it may be scheduled on the second and fourth Wednesday in the month.

  • In some years, the rule may be scheduled beginning on the first Wednesday of the year. In other years, it may be scheduled beginning on the second Wednesday of the year.

  • A rule must be scheduled every 25 days, regardless of date. Such a rule is scheduled on different dates each month and each year.

The IOA Calendar facility provides special calendars, called periodic calendars, to allow specification of these scheduling requirements. These periodic calendars are very flexible.

To designate a calendar as periodic, you must type the reserved string ==PERIODIC== in the first 12 positions of the description field. Any text can be entered in the rest of the description field. This is illustrated in Figure 87.

Figure 87 Use of the Reserved String "==PERIODIC=="

Copy
COMMAND ===>                                        SCROLL===> CRSR
YEAR 2002  -  ==PERIODIC== GENERAL WORKDAY CALENDAR                          

The following are characteristics of periodic calendars:

  • In a periodic calendar, days are not marked using the letters Y (Yes) or N (No). Instead, a period identifier is used to mark working days in a period. A period identifier can be any letter from A to Z (except Y andN), any number from 0 to 9, or any other printable sign. If you need more characters, use characters falling within the hexadecimal range 4A through F9. All working days within the same period must be marked using the same period identifier character so that different identifier characters indicate different periods. Days that are not marked are nonworking days because they do not belong to any period in this calendar.

  • Identifiers from different periods can be interspersed throughout a periodic calendar.

  • A periodic calendar can consist of smaller units that do not correspond to regular months, in that they can be longer or shorter than regular months.

  • A periodic calendar can span a period, called a "logical year", which can be longer or shorter than one regular calendar year.

    When a periodic calendar spans parts of two regular calendar years, special considerations are likely to arise. For more information, see Special Year-End Handling of Periodic Calendars.

    A period can span any number of days, but no more than a preset number of days can elapse after the appearance of one identifier in a period until the appearance of the next matching identifier in the same period. After that period expires, the next matching identifier starts a new period.

    By default, this period is preset to 33 days. Once the length of the gap between matching identifiers exceeds 33 days, the period automatically closes.

The length of the default period can be changed from 33 days by the INCONTROL administrator, using optional Wish WM2888.

For more information on the use of periodic calendars, see DAYS: Basic Scheduling Parameter and WDAYS: Basic Scheduling Parameter.

The following are examples of periodic calendars:

Figure 88 Periodic Calendar – Example 1

Copy
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S--
   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1             
12                         A         A   A B   A                             
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S--
         1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1       
01             B                                       B                     
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S--

This example contains two periods, A and B.

  • Period A starts on December 13 and ends on December 23. During this period, the defined working days are December 13, December 18, December 20, and December 23.

  • Period B spans more than one calendar year. It starts on December 21 and ends on January 24. During this period, the defined working days are December 21, January 4, and January 24.

Figure 89 Periodic Calendar – Example 2

Copy
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S----
               1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 
    03                         B             A         B         A           
-----S-------------S-------------S----------0---S-------------S-------------S---
       1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +           
   04                                                B                       
-----S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S--

This example includes a period B that begins on March 9. The last marked working day of the period is March 21, which is followed by a 33-day gap. Assuming that Wish WM2888 has not been used to alter the default period of 33 days, period B automatically ends on April 23, and April 24 marks the beginning of a new period B. If no more B identifiers are added, this new B period ends on May 27.

Special Year-End Handling of Periodic Calendars

Rules, jobs, or missions may be improperly scheduled if a periodic calendar contains one or more periods that start in one year and continue into the next year, if both the following circumstances apply:

  • The default gap between occurrences of matching identifiers has been changed from 33 days to a longer period

    and

  • The first occurrence of the matching identifier in one logical year falls within the default gap that began at the last occurrence of the matching identifier in a prior logical year

In such cases, the period in the prior logical year overlaps the period in the later logical year, causing a scheduled rule not to run in the later logical year as expected.

To avoid this problem, remove logical years from periodic calendars as soon as they are no longer needed.

  • The FISCAL01 logical year extends from April 1, 2001 through March 31, 2002.

  • The FISCAL01 logical year contains a period identified as Period A that has been defined to begin on December 28, 2001 and to continue through January 15, 2002.

  • The FISCAL02 logical year extends from April 1, 2002 through March 31, 2003.

  • The FISCAL02 logical year also contains a period identified as Period A, defined to begin on April 20, 2002 and continue through May3, 2002.

  • Rule X is scheduled for the seventh day of Period A in each logical year, through the rule definition DAYS=D7PA.

In a case where the default gap is 33 days, Rule X runs in January 2002, and again in April 2002, as expected.

In a case where the default gap is changed from 33 to a longer period, for example, 120 days, the first day of Period A in the FISCAL02 logical year occurs less than 120 days after the last appearance of Period A in the FISCAL01 logical year. As a result, what appears to be the seventh day in Period A in April 2002 is not recognized as such, because the "old" Period A overlaps the "new" Period A. Consequently, Rule X does not run again when the user may have expected it to run.

Deleting Calendars

To delete calendars, type D next to the calendar names in the Calendar List screen and press Enter.

The confirmation window shown in Figure 90 is displayed, in sequence, for each calendar selected for deletion.

Figure 90 Calendar List Screen Delete Confirmation Window

Copy
CALENDARS IN LIB IOA.PROD.CAL                                 ------------(8.D)
COMMAND ===>                +--------------------------+        SCROLL===> CRSR
OPT  NAME ---               |   CONFIRM DELETE OPTION  | E  INIT   MOD   ID  
 D   BANKDAYS   <-----------|               (Y/N)      | 4   104     0 IOAPROD
     DAYSOFF                +--------------------------+ 0    30     0 IOAPROD
     HOLIDAYS          01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50    15    15     0 IOAPROD
     PERIOD1O          01.00 02/01/28 01/06/29 09:50    45    45     0 IOAPROD
 D   SACAYCLN          01.01 02/01/28 01/11/29 17:43    26    26     0 L3051 
     SPMONCLN          01.01 02/01/29 01/11/30 15:00   117   104     0 M16A  
     SPWEKCLN          01.01 02/01/29 01/11/30 15:10   117   104     0 M16A  
     STOCKDAY          01.00 02/01/30 01/06/31 09:50    45    45     0 IOAPROD
     WORKDAYS          01.01 02/01/30 01/11/31 17:43    26    26     0 L3051 
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>  NO MORE CALENDARS IN LIBRARY  <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
OPTIONS: S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT  W INSERT BY WEEK DAYS  C COPY 13.54.14

To delete the calendar type Y (Yes) in the window.

To cancel the delete request, type N (No) in the window.

If PDSMAN is operational at your site, $$$SPACE members are not deleted.

For each calendar deleted, a message is written to the IOA Log file.

Exiting the IOA Calendar Facility

When exiting the IOA Calendar facility, screens are exited in the following sequence:

  1. Calendar Definition screen

  2. Year List screen

  3. Calendar List screen

If the Calendar List screen was bypassed as you entered the IOA Calendar facility (that is, if you entered a CALENDAR value in the entry panel), the Calendar List screen is not displayed upon exiting the Year List screen; instead, the entry panel is displayed.

Calendar Facility Entry Panel

The commands and options available when exiting screens depend on the screen being exited and on whether changes have been made. If changes have been made, the selected exit options and commands determine whether the changes are saved. Exit options and commands are discussed below on a screen by screen basis.

Exiting the Calendar Definition Screen

Use any of the following commands, or press the corresponding PFKey, to exit the Calendar Definition screen:

Table 109 Commands for Exiting the Calendar Definition Screen

Command

Description

CANCEL

Cancel the changes made to the calendar definition and return to the Year List screen.

The following exit commands retain changes to the calendar definition in memory. To permanently save the changes to disk, you must also request that the changes be saved when you exit the Year List screen.

END (PF03/PF15) Enter

Keep changes to the calendar definition in memory and exit to the Year List screen.

NEXTYEAR (PF11/PF23)

Keep changes to the calendar definition in memory and display the next calendar definition in the Year List screen.

PREVYEAR (PF10/PF22)

Keep changes to the calendar definition in memory and display the previous calendar definition in the Year List screen.

Exiting the Year List Screen

Press END (PF03/PF15) to exit the Year List screen. If changes made to at least one calendar definition have been kept in memory or if any changes have been made to the Year List screen, the Exit Option window is displayed. This window is shown in Figure 91. For more information, see Exiting the Calendar List Screen.

Figure 91 Year List Screen Exit Option Window

Copy
LIST OF YEARS IN IOA.PROD.CAL                                 CALENDAR WORKDAYS
COMMAN +-----------------------------------------------------------+  ===> CRSR
OPT  N |                 PLEASE SELECT EXIT OPTION                 |       
     1 |                                                           |       
     1 |     SAVE    CREATE                                        |       
     1 |                                                           |       
====== |     LIBRARY IOA.PROD.CAL                                  |  << =====
       |     TABLE   WORKDAYS                                      |       
       |                                                           |       
       +-----------------------------------------------------------+       
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
                                                                           
OPTIONS: S SELECT   D DELETE   I INSERT  W INSERT BY WEEK DAYS  C COPY 08.53.50

Fill in the Exit Option window as follows:

The LIBRARY and TABLE (member) fields indicate the library and member in which the calendar definitions must be saved. The specified values can be modified, for example, to save the calendar definitions in a different member.

  • To save all changes currently in memory and exit the Year List screen, type Y (Yes) after the word SAVE or CREATE, as follows:

  • Type Y after the word SAVE if a member with the same calendar name already exists in the specified library.

  • Type Y after the word CREATE if a member with the same calendar name does not exist in the specified library.

If you create a new calendar member, the member name does not appear in the Calendar List screen upon exiting the Year List screen; it first appears when you reenter the Calendar List screen from the entry panel.

  • To cancel changes currently in memory and exit the Year List screen, type N (No) after the word SAVE or CREATE.

  • To close the Exit Option window and remain in the Year List screen (with the changes remaining in memory), press RESET (PF04/PF16).

Exiting the Calendar List Screen

Press END (PF03/PF15) to exit the Calendar List screen.

Exiting the Entry Panel

Press END (PF03/PF15) to exit the entry panel.

Utilities Under ISPF

Several IOA facilities can only be activated under ISPF. To activate these facilities, select Option 6 on the IOA Primary Option menu (under ISPF) or invoke the IOAUTIL CLIST from the TSO Command Processor. The IOA Online Utilities menu, which is described in the following section, "IOA Online Utilities Menu," is displayed.

The INCONTROL administrator can remove user authority to access Option 6 on the IOA Primary Option menu. In this case, the IOA Online Utilities menu is not displayed.

IOA Online Utilities Menu

Depending on the INCONTROL products that are available at your site, different online utility options are displayed in the On-line Utilities menu. Figure 92 shows the IOA On-line Utilities menu that is displayed when all applicable INCONTROL products are active.

Figure 92 IOA Online Utilities Menu when all INCONTROL Products are Installed

Copy
------------------------------ ON-LINE UTILITIES ------------------------------
                                                            USERID   - N06    
                                                            TIME     - 13:40  
                                                            TERMINAL - 3278   
                                                                              
   D1  DECOLLATING          - Schedule a Report Decollating Mission           
   D2  PRINT                - Schedule a Printing Mission                     
   D3  BACKUP/MIGRATION     - Schedule a Backup/Migration Mission             
   D4  RESTORE              - Schedule a Restore Mission                      
   I1  PREREQ CONDITION     - Add/Check/Delete a Prerequisite Condition       
   M1  JOB ORDER ISSUE      - Issue a Job Order                               
   M2  AUTOEDIT SIMUL       - Perform an AutoEdit Simulation                  
   M3  SIMUL/TAPE PULL      - Prepare Simulation/Tape Pull List Job           
   M4  PARAM PROMPTING      - Parameter Prompting Facilities                  
   M5  QUICK SCHEDULE       - Quick Schedule Definition                       
   M6  USER INTERFACE       - End-User Job Order Interface                    
   R1  CTM/RESTART SIM      - CONTROL-M/Restart Simulation                    
   R2  DATASET CLEANUP      - CONTROL-M/Restart Dataset Cleanup               
   R3  JOB DATASET LIST     - Prepare a Job Dataset List                      
   R4  STANDALONE           - CONTROL-M/Restart Standalone                    
   T1  CONTROL-M/Tape SIMUL - Simulate CONTROL-M/Tape Rules                   
   X   EXIT                 - Exit This Menu                                  
                                                                              
OPTION  ===>                                                                  

If DOCU/TEXT has also been installed at your site, an additional utility, Option U1, is displayed in the Online Utilities menu.

To access an available utility, type the desired option number in the OPTION field and press Enter.

Option I1, which is also available when Control-O is installed as a standalone product, is described on the following pages. For the descriptions of other utilities on the menu, see the user guides of the relevant products.

Online utilities utilize standard ISPF profile capabilities.

Quick transfer to a utility can be performed by specifying =opt from another utility screen, or =6.opt from a non-utility screen, such as Log screen, where opt is the option in the Online Utilities menu.

I1: Add/Check/Delete a Prerequisite Condition

This utility adds prerequisite conditions to, checks the existence of prerequisite conditions in, and deletes prerequisite conditions from, the IOA Conditions file.

The Prerequisite Condition Utility screen, shown in Figure 93, can be displayed in the following ways:

  • Select Option I1 in the Online Utilities menu.

  • Invoke the IOACCND CLIST from the TSO Command Processor screen.

Figure 93 Prerequisite Condition Utility Screen

Copy
-----------------------  PREREQUISITE CONDITION UTILITY  ---------------------
COMMAND ===>                                                                 
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
  FUNCTION                ===> ADD                  (ADD/CHECK/DELETE)       
                                                                             
  CONDITION NAME          ===> SALARY_RPT_OK                                 
                                                                             
  Enter either date or STAT:                                                 
                                                                             
  CONDITION DATE          ===> STAT                 (DDMM OR STAT)           
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
  ENTER YES TO CONTINUE   ===> YES                                           
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             
                                                                             

To activate the utility, fill in the fields shown in Table 110 and press Enter:

Table 110 Prerequisite Condition Utility Screen Fields

Field

Description

FUNCTION

Function to be performed. Valid values are:

  • ADD – Add the specified condition to the IOA Conditions file.

  • CHECK – Check if the specified condition exists in the IOA Conditions file.

  • DELETE – Delete the specified condition from the IOA Conditions file.

CONDITION NAME

Name of the prerequisite condition (1 through 39 characters) to be added, checked, or deleted. If CONDITION NAME values contain the special characters ampersand (&) or apostrophe (‘), they must be repeated in order to appear on the screen.

CONDITION DATE

4-character date associated with the specified condition. Valid values are:

  • date – a valid date in date in mmdd or ddmm format, depending on the site standard

  • STAT – static
    This is the value assigned to conditions that are not date-dependent, such as DATABASE-OK

ENTER YES TO CONTINUE

Confirmation field to prevent the unintentional addition or deletion of a condition. When blank, the operation is not performed. Type YES to add, check or delete the condition.

To exit the screen without activating the utility, press PF03/PF15.